NEC Express5800/iR120a-1E

N8100-1575F/1576F/1577F
N8100-1578F/1579F/1580F
NEC Express5800/iR120a-1E
User's Guide
1st Edition
September 2009
ONL-510_013_01-iR120a1E-100-00-0909
PROPRIETARY NOTICE AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
The information disclosed in this document, including all designs and related materials, is the
valuable property of NEC Corporation (NEC) and /or its licensors. NEC and/or its licensors, as
appropriate, reserve all patent, copyright and other proprietary rights to this document, including all
design, manufacturing, reproduction, use, and sales rights thereto, except to the extent said rights are
expressly granted to others.
The NEC product(s) discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the terms of the
Warranty Statement accompanying each product. However, actual performance of each such
product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration, customer data, and operator control.
Since implementation by customers of each product may vary, the suitability of specific product
configurations and applications must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by NEC.
To allow for design and specification improvements, the information in this document is subject to
change at any time, without notice. Reproduction of this document or portions thereof without prior
written approval of NEC is prohibited.
First Printing, September 2009
Copyright 2009
NEC Corporation
7-1 Shiba 5-Chome, Minato-Ku
Tokyo 108-8001, Japan
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan
Keep this manual at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary.
SAFETY INDICATIONS
Follow the instructions in this manual for your safety to use the NEC Express server.
Your server contains components with possible danger, hazards that may cause by ignoring
warnings, and preventive actions against such hazards.
Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them
as well as described in this manual.
In this manual or warning labels, "WARNING" or "CAUTION" is used to indicate a degree of danger.
These terms are defined as follows:
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious
personal injury if the instruction is ignored.
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury,
including burns, or property damage if the instruction is ignored.
Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols. The
individual symbols are defined as follows:
This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard if the instruction is ignored.
An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type. (Attention)
This symbol indicates prohibited actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a particular
prohibited action. (Prohibited Action)
This symbol indicates mandatory actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a
mandatory action to avoid a particular hazard. (Mandatory Action)
(Example)
Symbol to draw attention
Term indicating a degree of danger
CAUTION
Plug in to a proper power source.
Use a grounded wall outlet of specified voltage. Use of an improper power
source may cause a fire or a power leak.
Symbol indicating a prohibited
action (may not always be
indicated)
Description of a danger
SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL AND WARNING LABELS
Attentions
Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock.
Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire.
Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught.
Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury.
Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury.
Indicates that improper use may cause explosion.
Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified.
Prohibited Actions
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire
may be caused.
Do not place the server near the fire. Otherwise, a fire may be caused.
Do not touch the component specified by this symbol. Otherwise, an electric shock or
burn may be caused.
Do not use the server in the place where water or liquid may pour. Otherwise, an
electric shock or fire may be caused.
Do not touch the server with wet hand. Otherwise, an electric shock may be caused.
Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified.
Mandatory Action
Unplug the power cord of the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be
caused.
Be sure to provide earthing. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be caused.
Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified. Make sure to follow
the instruction.
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help
CE Statement
Warning: This is a Class A product. In domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures (EN55022).
BSMI Statement
Trademarks
NEC ESMPRO and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are trademarks of NEC Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and other countries.
Intel, Pentium, and Xeon are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
PCI Express is a trademark of Peripheral Component Interconnect Special Interest Group.
Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
ROM-DOS is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Adaptec and its logo is a registered trademark of Adaptec, Inc. of United States.
LSI and the LSI logo design are trademarks or registered trademarks of LSI Corporation.
Adobe, Adobe logo, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation of the United States.
AVOCENT and DVC (Dambrackas Video Compression) are registered trademarks or trademarks of AVOCENT in the
United States and other countries.
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective trademark owners.
Windows Server 2008 stands for Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard operating system and Microsoft® Windows
Server® 2008 Enterprise operating system. Windows Vista stands for Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business operating
system. Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions stands for Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
Operating system and Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition operating system, or Microsoft®
Windows Server® 2003, Standard x64 Edition operating system and Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise x64
Edition operating system. Windows Server 2003 stands for Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Standard Edition
operating system and Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition operating system, or Microsoft® Windows
Server® 2003, Standard Edition operating system and Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Enterprise Edition operating
system. Windows XP x64 Edition stands for Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition operating system.
Windows XP stands for Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition operating system and Microsoft® Windows® XP
Professional operating system. Windows 2000 stands for Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server operating system and
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server operating system, and Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional operating
system. Windows NT stands for Microsoft® Windows NT® Server network operating system version 3.51/4.0 and
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation operating system version 3.51/4.0. Windows Me stands for Microsoft® Windows®
Millennium Edition operating system. Windows 98 stands for Microsoft® Windows®98 operating system. Windows 95
stands for Microsoft® Windows®95 operating system. WinPE stands for Microsoft® Windows® Preinstallation
Environment.
Momentary voltage drop prevention:
This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning. To prevent a
momentary voltage drop, an AC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit should be used.
Notes:
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of
NEC Corporation.
(2) The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.
(3) The contents of this manual shall not be copied or altered without the prior written permission
of NEC Corporation.
(4) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual. If you
notice any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this manual, contact the service representative
where you purchased this product.
(5) NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product, nor any liability for incidental or
consequential damages arising from the use of this manual regardless of Item (4).
i
PREFACE
Congratulations on the purchase of your NEC Express server.
Purchase of this server is your assurance of receiving state-of-the-art, high quality hardware to meet
your needs, both now and in the future.
Read this User's Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the NEC Express server and
appreciate its functions to the maximum extent.
NOTE: This guide contains procedures to use a floppy disk, however,
your server is not equipped with factory-installed floppy disk drive. Use
an optional USB floppy disk drive.
ii
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE
This manual is a guide for proper setup and use of your server.
This manual also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may arise
during setup or operation of your server.
Keep this manual for future use.
The following describes how to proceed with this manual.
How to Use This Manual
To aid you in finding information quickly, this manual contains the following information:
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server
includes information that needs attention to use the server. Make sure to read this chapter
before setting up and using the server. It also includes requirements and advisory information
for transfer and disposal of the server.
Chapter 2 General Description
includes information necessary to use the server, such as names and functions of its
components, handling of the optical disk drive.
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server
tells you how to select a site, unpack the system, assemble the rack-mount subsystem, make
cable connections, and power on your system.
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server
tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS SETUP
Utility and the RAID Configuration utility, which is used to configure RAID System in your
system. This chapter also provides information on mother board jumper settings.
Chapter 5 Installing Windows Server 2008
describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2008.
Chapter 6 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
Chapter 7 Installing Windows Server 2003
describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Chapter 8 Installing and Using Utilities
describes how to install the utilities for the server. It also includes a description on using the
attached "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" DVD.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the server.
This chapter also includes a description on relocating and storing the server.
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system.
Chapter 11 Upgrading Your Server
provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor, optional
memory, optional add-in cards, hard disk drives, peripheral devices, and power supply.
iii
Appendix A Specification
provides specifications for your server.
Appendix B Other Precautions
provides supplementary notes on using the server.
Appendix C IRQ
provides a list of factory-set IRQs.
Appendix D Using a Client Computer Which Has a CD Drive
describes how to install the management software of EXPRESSBUILDER to the client
computer without the DVD drive.
Appendix E Product Configuration Record Table
provides a table to be filled with your server configuration.
Text Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual. For safety symbols, see "SAFETY
INDICATIONS" provided earlier.
IMPORTANT:
Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server
NOTE:
Helpful and convenient piece of information
IN THE PACKAGE
The carton contains various accessories, as well as the server itself. See the packing list to make
sure that you have everything and that individual components are not damaged. If you find any
component missing or damaged, contact your service representative.
„
Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience. You will need
them to install an optional device or troubleshoot your server, as well as to set it up.
„
Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk, if any. Store the original disk as the
master disk in a designated place, and use its copy.
„
Improper use of any provided floppy disk, DVD-ROM, or CD-ROM may alter your
system environment. If you find anything unclear, immediately ask your service
representative for help.
iv
CONTENTS
Preface ..............................................................................................................................................i
About This User's Guide..................................................................................................................ii
In the Package.................................................................................................................................iii
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server........................................................................ 1-1
Warning Labels.............................................................................................................................1-2
Safety Notes..................................................................................................................................1-4
General .....................................................................................................................................1-4
Rack .........................................................................................................................................1-6
Power Supply and Power Cord Use .........................................................................................1-7
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection....................................................................1-9
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices.........................................................................1-11
During Operation ...................................................................................................................1-12
For Proper Operation ..................................................................................................................1-13
Transfer to Third Party ...............................................................................................................1-15
Disposal and Consumables .........................................................................................................1-16
Regarding the Transportation of this System..............................................................................1-16
User Support...............................................................................................................................1-16
Chapter 2 General Description ..................................................................................... 2-1
Overview ......................................................................................................................................2-2
System Chassis .............................................................................................................................2-3
Front View................................................................................................................................2-3
Rear View.................................................................................................................................2-5
Internal View ............................................................................................................................2-6
Mother Board................................................................................................................................2-8
Backplane Board...........................................................................................................................2-9
Standard Features .......................................................................................................................2-10
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN)..........................................................................2-11
AC LINK Feature...................................................................................................................2-11
Security ..................................................................................................................................2-11
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ....................................................................................................2-12
NEC ESMPRO.......................................................................................................................2-12
Maintenance Tools .................................................................................................................2-13
System Diagnostic Utility ......................................................................................................2-13
Remote Management..............................................................................................................2-13
Using Your Server.......................................................................................................................2-14
POWER Switch......................................................................................................................2-14
Identification of Servers ~ UID Switch ~...............................................................................2-19
v
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server ................................................................................ 3-1
Setup Flow....................................................................................................................................3-2
Unpacking the System ..................................................................................................................3-3
Installing Optional Devices ..........................................................................................................3-3
Selecting Server Site.....................................................................................................................3-4
Installing the Server......................................................................................................................3-6
Connecting Peripheral Devices...................................................................................................3-14
Connecting Power Cord..............................................................................................................3-17
Turning On the Server ................................................................................................................3-19
Installing Operating System .......................................................................................................3-21
Installing Utilities .......................................................................................................................3-21
Making Backup Copies of System Information..........................................................................3-22
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server.............................................................................. 4-1
System BIOS (SETUP) ................................................................................................................4-1
Starting SETUP Utility.............................................................................................................4-2
Description on On-Screen Items and Key Usage .....................................................................4-3
Configuration Examples...........................................................................................................4-4
Menu and Parameter Descriptions ...........................................................................................4-8
RAID System Configuration ......................................................................................................4-27
RAID......................................................................................................................................4-27
Configuration by Onboard RAID Controller .........................................................................4-32
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility and Universal RAID Utility................................4-47
Configuring Mother Board Jumpers ...........................................................................................4-50
Chapter 5 Installing Windows Server 2008 ................................................................. 5-1
Notice ...........................................................................................................................................5-1
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.......................................................5-1
Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports ...............................................................5-2
Installing Service Pack .............................................................................................................5-2
Updating System ......................................................................................................................5-2
Installing on the Mirrored Volume ...........................................................................................5-2
Mounting MO Device ..............................................................................................................5-2
About Removable Media .........................................................................................................5-2
Floppy Disk Drive....................................................................................................................5-2
About the System Partition Size...............................................................................................5-3
Installing Windows Server 2008...................................................................................................5-7
Preparations for Installation .....................................................................................................5-7
Windows Server 2008 Clean Installation .................................................................................5-7
Procedure for License Authentication ....................................................................................5-17
Updating the System ..............................................................................................................5-17
vi
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings .................................................................................5-20
LAN Driver and PROSet........................................................................................................5-20
Network Driver ......................................................................................................................5-22
Optional Network Board Driver (N8104-122/125/126) .........................................................5-22
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB).........................................5-23
Setting WOL ..........................................................................................................................5-25
Graphics Accelerator Driver...................................................................................................5-26
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-107).....................................................................5-27
Installing SAS Controller Driver (N8103-104A) ...................................................................5-27
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-115)....................................................................5-27
Installing Fibre Channel Controller Driver (N8190-127/131)................................................5-27
About Windows Activation ....................................................................................................5-28
The procedure to set PAE option............................................................................................5-33
Setting for Solving Problems......................................................................................................5-34
Memory Dump (Debug Information).....................................................................................5-34
How to Create a User-mode Process Dump File ....................................................................5-37
Network Monitor....................................................................................................................5-38
Re-installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist....................................5-39
Installing Maintenance Utilities..................................................................................................5-40
Making Backup Copies of System Information..........................................................................5-40
Chapter 6 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions ........................................... 6-1
Notice ...........................................................................................................................................6-1
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.......................................................6-1
Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports ...............................................................6-2
Installing Service Pack .............................................................................................................6-2
Updating System ......................................................................................................................6-2
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ..................6-2
Mounting MO Device ..............................................................................................................6-2
About Removable Media .........................................................................................................6-2
Floppy Disk Drive....................................................................................................................6-2
About the System Partition Size...............................................................................................6-3
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions..............................................................................6-4
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER" .............6-4
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation ............................................................6-7
Procedure for License Authentication ....................................................................................6-11
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack - ....................................................................6-11
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings .................................................................................6-18
PROSet...................................................................................................................................6-18
Network Driver ......................................................................................................................6-20
Optional Network Board Driver.............................................................................................6-21
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB).........................................6-22
Setting WOL ..........................................................................................................................6-24
Graphics Accelerator Driver...................................................................................................6-26
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-107).....................................................................6-26
Installing SAS Controller Driver (N8103-104A) ...................................................................6-26
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-115)....................................................................6-27
About Windows Activation ....................................................................................................6-28
vii
Setting for Solving Problems......................................................................................................6-30
Memory Dump (Debug Information).....................................................................................6-30
How to Create a User-mode Process Dump File ....................................................................6-33
Network Monitor....................................................................................................................6-34
Re-installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist....................................6-35
Installing Maintenance Utilities..................................................................................................6-37
Making Backup Copies of System Information..........................................................................6-38
Chapter 7 Installing Windows Server 2003 ................................................................. 7-1
BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 .................................................................7-1
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.......................................................7-1
Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports ...............................................................7-2
Application of Service Pack .....................................................................................................7-2
Updating System ......................................................................................................................7-2
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk ............................7-2
Mounting MO Device ..............................................................................................................7-2
About Removable Media .........................................................................................................7-3
Floppy Disk Drive....................................................................................................................7-3
About the Upgrade to Windows Server 2003 R2 .....................................................................7-3
About the System Partition Size...............................................................................................7-4
Installing Windows Server 2003...................................................................................................7-6
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER" .................................7-6
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation .................................................................................7-8
Procedure for License Authentication ....................................................................................7-12
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack - ....................................................................7-12
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings .................................................................................7-19
PROSet...................................................................................................................................7-19
Network Driver ......................................................................................................................7-20
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB).........................................7-21
Setting WOL ..........................................................................................................................7-23
Graphics Accelerator Driver...................................................................................................7-25
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-107).....................................................................7-25
Installing SAS Controller Driver (N8103-104A) ...................................................................7-25
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-115)....................................................................7-26
About Windows Activation ....................................................................................................7-27
The procedure to set PAE option............................................................................................7-29
Setting for Solving Problems......................................................................................................7-30
Memory Dump (Debug Information).....................................................................................7-30
How to Create a User-mode Process Dump File ....................................................................7-33
Network Monitor....................................................................................................................7-34
Re-installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist....................................7-35
Installing Maintenance Utilities..................................................................................................7-37
Making Backup Copies of System Information..........................................................................7-38
viii
Chapter 8 Installing and Using Utilities ....................................................................... 8-1
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER...........................................................................................................8-2
Autorun Menu ..........................................................................................................................8-6
NEC ESMPRO .............................................................................................................................8-7
Functions and Features.............................................................................................................8-7
Universal RAID Utility.................................................................................................................8-8
Setup with Express Setup .........................................................................................................8-8
Manual Setup ...........................................................................................................................8-8
Management of RAID System using NEC ESMPRO Manager...............................................8-9
Easy Configuration...................................................................................................................8-9
Creating Logical Drive of RAID 6...........................................................................................8-9
NEC Product Info Collection Utility ..........................................................................................8-10
Installation..............................................................................................................................8-10
Using Utility...........................................................................................................................8-11
Uninstallation .........................................................................................................................8-11
Chapter 9 Maintenance.................................................................................................. 9-1
Making Backup Copies ................................................................................................................9-1
Cleaning........................................................................................................................................9-2
Cleaning the Server ..................................................................................................................9-3
Cleaning the Interior.................................................................................................................9-4
Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse.................................................................................................9-5
Cleaning Disc ...........................................................................................................................9-6
System Diagnostics.......................................................................................................................9-7
Test Items .................................................................................................................................9-7
Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics ...................................................................................9-8
Relocating/Storing The Server....................................................................................................9-11
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 10-1
System Viewers ..........................................................................................................................10-2
LED ............................................................................................................................................10-3
POWER LED .........................................................................................................................10-3
STATUS LED.........................................................................................................................10-3
DISK ACCESS LED..............................................................................................................10-5
UID LED (Unit Identification)...............................................................................................10-5
LINK/ACT LED ....................................................................................................................10-5
SPEED LED...........................................................................................................................10-5
Hard Disk Drive LED ............................................................................................................10-6
Error Messages ...........................................................................................................................10-7
Error Messages after Power-on ..............................................................................................10-7
POST Error Messages ............................................................................................................10-8
Messages displayed by RAID Controller during POST .......................................................10-12
Beep Codes...........................................................................................................................10-16
Error Messages on Virtual LCD ...........................................................................................10-17
ix
Solving Problems......................................................................................................................10-19
Problems with the Server .....................................................................................................10-19
Problems with Windows.......................................................................................................10-25
Problems with RAID System and RAID Controller ............................................................10-33
Problems with N8190-127/131 FibreChannel Controller.....................................................10-34
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ..........................................................................10-35
Problems with Autorun Menu ..............................................................................................10-36
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information.........................................................................10-37
Memory Dump .........................................................................................................................10-37
Preparing for Memory Dumping..........................................................................................10-37
Saving the Dump File...........................................................................................................10-38
Recovery for Windows System.................................................................................................10-39
Maintenance Tools....................................................................................................................10-40
Starting Maintenance Tools ..................................................................................................10-40
Function of Maintenance Tools ............................................................................................10-42
Maintenance Tools with Remote Console ............................................................................10-44
Resetting the Server..................................................................................................................10-46
Forced Shutdown......................................................................................................................10-46
Chapter 11
Upgrading Your Server .............................................................................11-1
Safety Notes................................................................................................................................11-2
Static Precautions .......................................................................................................................11-3
Preparing for Installation and Removal ......................................................................................11-4
Device Installation or Removal Procedure .................................................................................11-6
Hard Disk Drive .....................................................................................................................11-6
DIMM ..................................................................................................................................11-12
Processor (CPU)...................................................................................................................11-21
PCI Board.............................................................................................................................11-27
Appendix A
Specifications............................................................................................A-1
Appendix B
Other Precautions.....................................................................................B-1
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller ...................................................................... B-1
Server Management Software ................................................................................................. B-1
Floppy Disk............................................................................................................................. B-1
CD/DVD Discs........................................................................................................................ B-4
Tape Media.............................................................................................................................. B-4
Keyboard ................................................................................................................................. B-5
Mouse...................................................................................................................................... B-6
Appendix C IRQ..............................................................................................................C-1
Appendix D Using a Client Computer Which Has a CD Drive ...................................D-1
Appendix E
Product Configuration Record Table ...................................................... E-1
Hardware ................................................................................................................................. E-1
Software .................................................................................................................................. E-3
x
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 1
Notes on Using Your Server
This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of your server.
1-2 Notes on Using Your Server
WARNING LABELS
The warning label is attached to components with possible danger or their vicinity in your server to
inform the user that a hazardous situation may arise when operating the server. (Do not intentionally
remove or damage any of the labels.)
If you find any labels totally/partially removed or illegible due to damage, contact your sales
representative.
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive Model
Attached to the bottom of the chassis
Notes on Using Your Server 1-3
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive Model
Attached to the bottom of the chassis
1-4 Notes on Using Your Server
SAFETY NOTES
This section provides notes on using your server safely. Read this section carefully to ensure proper
and safe use of the server. For symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS" provided earlier. For
component names used in this section, see Chapter 2.
General
WARNING
Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly
affect human lives.
Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices
concerning human lives, including medical devices, nuclear facilities and
devices, aeronautics and space devices, transportation facilities and devices;
and facilities and devices requiring high reliability. NEC assumes no liability for
any accident resulting in personal injury, death, or property damage if the
server has been used in the above conditions.
Do not use the server if any smoke, odor, or noise is present.
If smoke, odor, or noise is present, immediately turn off the server and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet, then contact your service
representative. Using the server in such conditions may cause a fire.
Keep needles or metal objects away from the server.
Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventilation holes in the server or
openings in the optical disk drive. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
Always install the server on a rack conforming to the relevant standard.
Install the server on a rack confirming to the EIA standard for the server to be
used. Do not use the server with installed on any other rack than standard EIA
19-inch rack or without the installation on a proper rack. Failure to follow these
instructions may cause the server to operate incorrectly and/or personal injury
or damages of surrounding devices to occur. Contact your service
representative for the racks available for the server.
Do not use the server in any unapproved place.
Install the server on a standard EIA 19-inch rack assembly. Do not install the
rack containing the server in a place inappropriate to the rack installation
environment.
Failure to follow these instructions may cause some bad influences to be
imposed on the server and other systems installed on the rack and also a fire or
personal injury due to falling of the rack may occur. For the detailed explanation
on the place where the server should be installed and the earthquake-resistant
construction for the rack, refer to the manual attached to the rack or contact you
service representative.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-5
CAUTION
Keep water or foreign matter away from the server.
Do not let any form of liquid (water etc.) or foreign matter (e.g., pins or paper
clips) enter the server. Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric
shock, a fire, or a failure of the server. When such things accidentally enter
the server, immediately turn off the power and disconnect the power plug
from the outlet. Do not disassemble the server. Contact your service
representative.
1-6 Notes on Using Your Server
Rack
CAUTION
Do not carry or install the server only by a single person.
More than one person is required to carry or install the rack. Failure to follow
this instruction may cause the rack to fall to result in personal injury and/or
breakage of surrounding devices. In particular, a high rack (such as 44U rack)
is unstable if it is not fixed by stabilizers. More than one person must always
carry or install the rack while they support it.
Do not install the server so that the load may be concentrated on a specific
point.
Install stabilizers on the rack so that the total load of the rack and devices
mounted on the rack is not concentrated on a singe point or join more than one
rack with each other to distribute the load. Failure to follow this instruction may
cause the rack to fall to result in personal injury.
Do not install components on the server only by a single person.
More than one person is required to install parts including the doors and trays
for the rack. Failure to follow this instruction may cause some parts to fall to be
broken and/or to result in personal injury.
Insert hinges completely.
When installing the rack door, make sure that hinge pins at top and bottom of
the door are completely inserted into the rack. Failure to follow this instruction
may cause the door to fall to be broken and/or to result in personal injury.
Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.
Always pull out a device from the rack in the state that the rack is made stable
(by the installation of stabilizers or earthquake-resistant construction).
Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.
Pulling out more than one device from the rack may cause the rack to be fallen.
Only pull out a single device from the rack at a time.
Do not provide the wiring for the server to exceed the rating of the power
supply.
To prevent burns, fires, and device damages, the power supplied to the power
supply in the rack shall not exceed the rating load of the power branch circuit.
Contact your electric constructor or the local power company for the
requirements on the wiring and installation of electric facilities.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-7
Power Supply and Power Cord Use
WARNING
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
Do not disconnect/connect the plug while your hands are wet. Failure to
follow this warning may cause an electric shock.
Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe.
Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe. Failure to follow this warning
may cause a gas explosion.
CAUTION
Plug in to a proper power source.
Use a grounded wall outlet of specified voltage. Use of an improper power
source may cause a fire or a power leak.
Do not install the server where you need an extension cord. Use of a cord that
does not meet the power specifications of your server may heat up the cord
and cause a fire.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of
connections.
The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet, which may
cause a fire.
Do not pull the cable when disconnecting it.
When disconnecting the cable from the device, hold the cable connector and
pull it straight out. Pulling the cable out by the cable portion or giving
mechanical stress to the connector could damage the cables and connectors
to result in an electrical shock hazard or a fire.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug (imperfect
contact) may cause a fire. Heat will also be generated if condensation is
formed on dusty blades of the halfway inserted plug, increasing the possibility
of fire.
1-8 Notes on Using Your Server
CAUTION
Use the authorized power cord only.
Use only the power cord that comes with your server. Use of an unauthorized
power cord may cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow.
Also, observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a
damaged cord.
„ Do not stretch the cord harness.
„ Do not pinch the power cord.
„ Do not bend the power cord.
„ Keep chemicals away from the power cord.
„ Do not twist the power cord.
„ Do not place any object on the power cord.
„ Do not bundle power cords.
„ Do not alter, modify, or repair the power cord.
„ Do not secure the power cord with staples or equivalents.
„ Do not use any damaged power cord. (Replace a damaged power cord
with a new one of the same specifications. Ask your service representative
for replacement.)
Do not use the attached power cord for any other devices or usage.
The power cord that comes with your server is designed aiming to connect
with this server and to use with the server, and its safety has been tested. Do
not use the attached power cord for any other purpose. Doing so may cause a
fire or an electric shock.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-9
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection
CAUTION
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than
specified in this User's Guide. Failure to follow this instruction may cause a
fire.
„ a dusty place
„ a humid place such as near a boiler
„ a place exposed to direct sunlight
„ an unstable place
Do not use the server in the place where corrosive gases exist.
Make sure not to locate or use the server in the place where corrosive gases
(sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia, ozone,
etc.) exist.
Also, do not set it in the environment where the air (or dust) includes
components accelerating corrosion (ex. sulfur, sodium chloride) or conductive
metals. There is a risk of a fire due to corrosion and shorts of an internal
printed board.
Pay attention not to drop the server.
Firmly hold the bottom of the server when installing it in the rack.
The rack mount bracket has no stopper or lock mechanism to prevent the
server from falling down. Failure to follow this instruction may cause personal
injury.
Do not leave the device being pulled out from the rack.
Do not work with the server with the device being pulled out from the rack.
The rack mount bracket has no stopper or lock mechanism to prevent the
server from falling down. Failure to follow this instruction may cause personal
injury.
Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed.
Do not install the server on a rack with the cover being removed. Failure to
follow this instruction may reduce the cooling effect in the server to result in
some malfunction and/or dusts to enter the server to result in a fire or electric
shock.
Do not pinch your finger with rails or other components.
Note sufficiently that your fingers may not be caught between a rail and
another mechanical part or cut by a rail at installation or removal of the server
from the rack.
1-10 Notes on Using Your Server
CAUTION
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged
to a power source.
Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power
outlet before connecting/disconnecting any interface cable to/from the server.
If the server is off-powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source,
touching an internal device, cable, or connector may cause an electric shock
or a fire resulted from a short circuit.
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.
Use only interface cables provided by NEC and locate a proper device and
connector before connecting a cable. Using an authorized cable or
connecting a cable to an improper destination may cause a short circuit,
resulting in a fire.
Also, observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable.
„ Do not use any damaged cable connector.
„ Do not step on the cable.
„ Do not place any object on the cable.
„ Do not use the server with loose cable connections.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-11
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices
WARNING
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion
other than described in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may
cause an electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Your server contains the lithium battery. Do not remove the battery. Placing
the lithium close to a fire or in the water may cause an explosion.
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium
battery, contact your service representative. Do not disassemble the server to
replace or recharge the battery by yourself.
Disconnect the power plug before accessing inside the server, or connecting
the peripherals.
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power plug from a
power outlet before cleaning or installing/removing internal optional devices.
Touching any internal device of the server with its power cord connected to a
power source may cause an electric shock even of the server is off-powered.
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug
with a dry cloth. Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty
plug, which may cause a fire.
CAUTION
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as
hard disk drives are very hot. Leave the server until its internal components
fully cool down before installing/removing any component.
Make sure to complete installation.
Always install a power cable, interface cable, and/or board firmly. An
incompletely installed component may cause a contact failure, resulting in
smoking or fire.
Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap.
The unused power supply cable connectors are covered with the protective
cap to prevent short circuits and electrical hazards, when removing the power
supply cable connector from the install devices, attach the protective cap to
the connector. Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric
shock.
1-12 Notes on Using Your Server
During Operation
WARNING
Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms.
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet when a thunderstorm is
approaching. If it starts thundering before you disconnect the power plug, do
not touch any part of the server including the cables. Failure to follow this
warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Keep animals away from the server.
Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Do not leave the server with its tray of optical disk drive ejected.
Dust may enter the server through openings and cause malfunctions of the
server. Any person may also bump it and get injured.
Do not pull out or remove the server from the rack unnecessarily.
Do not pull out or remove the server from the rack unnecessarily. Pulling out
or removing the server from the rack may cause not only the server to operate
incorrectly but also the server to fall on people to make them injured.
Stay away from the fan.
Keep your hand or hair away from the cooling fan on the rear of the server.
Failure to follow this warning may get your hand or hair caught in the fan,
resulting in injury.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-13
FOR PROPER OPERATION
Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server. Use of the server ignoring the
notes will cause malfunctions or failures of the server.
„
Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the
server and peripheral devices.
„
Verify that the access LED on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting
the disc.
„
When you have just turned off the server, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it back
on. If the server is connected to the UPS, set at least 10 seconds delay in the power-on
schedule.
„
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server.
„
Clean the server on a regular basis. (See Chapter 9 for cleaning.) Regular cleaning
proactively prevents various failures of the server.
„
Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop. To prevent this problem, it is
recommended to use of an uninterruptible power supply unit.
„
For the disc which does not conform to the standard, the playback of such a disc with the
optical disk drive is not guaranteed.
„
Check and adjust the system clock before the operation if any of the following conditions
is applicable.
„
– After carriage of device
– After storage of device
– After the device is entered into the pause state under the environmental condition
enduring device operation (temperature: 10°C - 35°C, humidity: 20% - 80%)
Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month. When the system clock is
installed in a system requiring high time precision, it is recommended to use a time server
(NTP server).
If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of time in spite of
adjustment, contact your service representative to ask maintenance.
„
Store the unit under the storage condition (temperature: –10°C - 55°C, humidity: 20% 80%, without condensation) to allow internal devices and the unit to operate correctly in
the next operation.
„
It is recommended that the server, the internal devices, and media (such as tape cartridge)
should be stored in a place where the room temperature can be maintained. It is important
for the server or internal devices to work normally after storage. Store the device in the
place where temperature ranges between -10 to 55°C and humidity ranges between 20 to
80%, without dew condensation.
1-14 Notes on Using Your Server
„
Make sure to use optional devices supported by the server. Some non-supported devices
may be physically installed/connected but cause failures of the server as well as
malfunctions of the server.
„
NEC recommends you use NEC's genuine products. Some third-party products claim that
they support the server. However, repair of the server due to a failure or damage resulted
from use of such third-party products will be charged.
„
Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the server. Turn off the cellular phone or
pager. Radio interference may cause malfunctions of the server.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-15
TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY
The following must be observed when you transfer (or sell) the server or software provided with the
server to a third party:
Make sure to provide this manual along with the server to a third party.
IMPORTANT: About data on the hard disk drive
Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data (e.g.,
customers' information or companies' management information) on the
removed hard disk drive to any third parties.
Data seems to be erased when you empty "Recycle Bin" of Windows or
execute the "format" command of the operating system. However, the
actual data remains written on the hard disk drive. Data not erased
completely may be restored by special software and used for
unexpected purposes.
It is strongly recommended that the software or service (both available
at stores) for data erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble
explained above. For details on data erasure, ask your sales
representative.
Provided software
To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party, the following
requirements must be satisfied:
„
All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be
retained.
„
Transfer requirements listed in "Software License Agreement" that comes with each
software application must be satisfied.
„
Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before
transferring the server.
1-16 Notes on Using Your Server
DISPOSAL AND CONSUMABLES
„
Dispose of the server, all the internal devices, and CD-ROMs according to all national
laws and regulations. Also dispose of the power cord provided with the server to avoid
diversion to some other devices.
IMPORTANT:
„
„
For disposal (or replacement) of the battery on the mother board of
the server, consult with your service representative.
„
It is the user's responsibility to completely erase or modify all the
data stored in storage device such as hard disk drive so that the data
cannot be restored.
Your server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and
require replacement, such as fans, internal batteries, the internal optical disk drive, and the
mouse. For stable operation of the server, NEC recommends you replace these
components on a regular basis. Consult with your service representative for replacement
or the product lives.
REGARDING THE TRANSPORTATION OF THIS SYSTEM
This system and/or associated options and accessories may be using lithium metal batteries or
lithium ion batteries.
There may be restrictions regarding the air or sea transportation of such lithium batteries.
Please contact your service representative prior to transporting this system and/or its options.
USER SUPPORT
Before Asking for Repair, do the following when the server appears to fail:
1.
Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected.
2.
See Chapter 10 to find if your problem fits the description. If it does, take the
recommended measure for it.
3.
Check if the software required for operation of the server is properly installed.
If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions, consult with your service
representative immediately. Take notes on LED indications of the server and alarm indications on
the display unit before consultation, which may provide a significant help to your service
representative.
Notes on Using Your Server 1-17
Advice for Health
The longer you keep using the computer equipment, the more you become
tired, which may cause disorders of your body. When you use a computer,
observe the following to keep yourself from getting tired:
Good Working Posture
You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a
computer:
• You sit on a chair with your back straight.
• Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the
keyboard.
• You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height.
You have "good working posture" as described in the above when no part
of your body is under excess strain, in other words when your muscles are
most relaxed.
You have "bad posture" when you sit with your back hunched up or you
operate a display unit with your face close to the screen. Bad working
posture may cause eye strain or poor eyesight.
Adjustment of Display Unit Angles
Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and
vertical angles. This adjustment is important to prevent the screen from
reflecting bright lights and to make the display contents easy to see. You
will not be able to keep "good working posture" and you will feel more tired
than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal
and vertical angles.
Adjustment of Screen Brightness and Contrast
The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions. The
most suitable brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the
working environment (well-lighted room or insufficient light). Adjust
brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy to see. An
extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes.
Adjustment of Keyboard Angle
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an
angle. Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate.
The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders, arms, and
fingers.
Cleaning of Equipment
Clean equipment regularly. It is difficult to see the display contents on a
dusty screen. Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight.
Fatigue and Rest
If you feel tired, you should stop working and do light exercises.
1-18 Notes on Using Your Server
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 2
General Description
This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server. It
includes names and functions of the components and features of the server.
2-2 General Description
OVERVIEW
Your server is a modular, multiprocessing server based on the Intel microprocessor family. It is a
solid performer and offers the latest technology. The combination of compute performance, memory
capacity, and integrated I/O provides a high performance environment for many server market
applications. These range from large corporations supporting remote offices to small companies
looking to obtain basic connectivity capability such a file and print services, e-mail, web access,
web site server, etc.
Your server is housed and available as a rack-mount system. Your server conveniently installs into a
standard EIA 19-inch rack assembly.
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
As application requirements increase, you can expand your server with an additional memory, addin boards and peripheral devices; tape devices, optical disk drive, and hard disk drives. The server
features the following major components.
„
A high-performance Quad-Core Intel® Xeon® processor
„
Up to 32GB of memory (using 4GB DIMMs)
Minimum configuration is 1GB of memory
„
Dual channel memory configuration
„
Two PCIe (x8) slots are factory-installed.
„
Onboard RAID Controller
„
Onboard 1000/100/10 network controller
General Description 2-3
SYSTEM CHASSIS
Names and functions of the components are shown below.
Front View
3.5-inch had disk drive model
6
7
1
3-1
4
8
9
10
2 3-2
12-1
13
5
11
12-2
13
12-3
13
12-4
13
2.5-inch had disk drive model
6
7
1
3-1
4
8
9
10
2 3-2
12-1
13
12-2
5
11
13
12-3
13
12-5
13
12-7
13
12-4
13
12-6
13
12-8
13
2-4 General Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
POWER LED (green)
This LED turns green when the power is turned on.
DISK ACCESS LED (green/amber)
This LED is green during access to the internal hard disk drives or optical disk drive.
The LED turns amber when the hard disk drive fails. The LED blinks green and amber
alternately during rebuild processing (in RAID configuration).
ACT/LINK LED (green)
This LED is on while the system is connected to the network.
UID (Unit ID) LED (blue)
This LED goes on when the UID switch is pressed. (The LED also goes on or blinks when
software issues a command.)
STATUS LED (green/amber) (on the front panel)
This LED indicates the server status. The LED is green during normal operation. The LED
turns amber or blinks when the server enters the abnormal state.
VGA port connector
This connector is used to connect the server to a device with the VGA port.
USB connector
These connectors are used to connect the server to a device with the USB interface.
Reset switch
Press this switch to reset the system. In normal operation, this switch is not used.
UID (Unit ID) switch
Press the UID switch to turn on/off the UID LED. Pressing the switch once turns on the LED.
Pressing it again turns it off.
POWER switch
The POWER switch is used to turn the power of the server ON/OFF. If you press this switch
once, the power is turned on with the POWER LED going on green. If you press the switch
again, the power is turned off with the LED going off. Keep pressing the switch for 4 seconds
or more forcibly shuts down the system. This switch can be used as a SLEEP switch if the OS
supports sleep feature. In SLEEP Mode, this LED blinks.
NMI (DUMP) switch
Press this switch to dump system memory. In normal operation, this switch is not used.
Hard disk drive bays
Up to four hard disk drives can be installed in the bays on 3.5-inch disk model server.
Up to eight hard disk drives can be installed in the bays on 2.5-inch disk model server.
The last-digit number indicates the channel number. In the standard configuration, the dummy
sponge blocks are installed in all the bays.
DISK LED (green/amber)
LED on the hard disk drive. Each LED is green during access to the hard disk drive.
The LED turns amber when the hard disk drive fails. The LED blinks green and amber
alternately during rebuild processing (in RAID configuration).
General Description 2-5
Rear View
1
4-2
2
3
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
8
4-1
5
6-1 6-2
3
10
5
9
12-1
3
12-2
11
AC inlet
Connect the AC power cord to this socket.
Serial port B (COM B) connector
The connector is used to connect a device with the serial interface.
LINK/ACT LED (green)
The ACT/LINK LED is lit green when the network port is being linked with the connected device
such as a hub (LINK state). If a data is transferred through a network port, the LED blinks green
(ACT state).
LAN connectors
The connectors are used to connect the network systems on LAN through 1000BASET/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T interface.
The last digit number indicates LAN port number.
* The number may differ from that shown on OS.
1000/100/10 LED
This LED indicates the transfer rate of LAN port.
USB connectors 1/2
The connector is used to connect a device compliant with the USB interface. The last digit
number "1" indicates connector 1, and the number "2" indicates connector 2.
Monitor connector
The connector is used to connect a display unit.
POWER LED (green)
This LED turns green when the power is turned on.
Management LAN connector
The connector is used to connect with 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T interface.
Cannot be used for data transmission.
100/10 LED
This LED indicates the transfer rate of management LAN port.
UID (Unit ID) switch / UID LED (blue)
Press the UID switch to turn on/off the UID LEDs. Press this switch using a thin, nonconductive
stick.
PCI board extension slot
Install the optional PCI board into these slots.
12-1 Low-profile PCI board
12-2 Low-profile PCI board
2-6 General Description
Internal View
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive Model
3-11
3-7
3-6 3-5
9
8
7
5-2
6-2
6-1
5-1
2
3-1
3-3
3-4
1-0
1-1
1-2
1-3
10
1
Drive bays
The last digit number indicates the drive bay number. Hard disk drive is optional.
2
Backplane board
3
Cooling fan (The last digit number indicates the fan number.)
4
Power supply unit
5
DIMM
6
CPU/Heat sink
7
Air duct
8
PCI riser card
9
Mother board
10
Front panel board
4
General Description 2-7
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive Model
3-11
3-6
3-5
9
8
7
5-2
6-2
6-1
5-1
3-7
2
1-0
3-1
3-3
3-4
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
10
1-6
1-7
1
Drive bays
The last digit number indicates the drive bay number. Hard disk drive is optional.
2
Backplane board
3
Cooling fan (The last digit number indicates the fan number.)
4
Power supply unit
5
DIMM
6
CPU/Heat sink
7
Air duct
8
PCI riser card
9
Mother board
10
Front panel board
4
2-8 General Description
MOTHER BOARD
1
2-1
1
3
4-1
4-2
17
2-2
16
5
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
14 13
12
Power connector
DIMM socket
2-1 CPU1_DIMM1 to CPU1_DIMM4
2-2 CPU2_DIMM1 to CPU2_DIMM4
Connector for power monitor
Processor (CPU) socket
4-1 CPU1
4-2 CPU2
Backplane board connector
SATA connector
6-1 SATA0-3
6-2 SATA4-5
11 10
9
8
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
7 6-1 6-2
Password clear jumper switch
Connector for front panel board
SW RAID jumper switch
Front USB connector
Speaker
CMOS configuration jumper switch
Lithium battery
Front VGA cable connector
Serial port A (COM A) connector
PCI riser card slot
External connector
General Description 2-9
BACKPLANE BOARD
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
10
3
1-3
4
1-2
5-3
5-1
2-3
2-2
7 8 6
1-1
5-5
5-4
1-0
5-7
5-6
5-11
2-1
2-0
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
3
5-1
9
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
7
6
5-7
8
10
1-7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1-6
2-7
2-6
1-5
1-4
2-5 2-4
1-3
1-2
2-3 2-2
1-1
4
1-0
2-1
2-0
SATA/SAS connector
The last digit number indicates connector number.
Hard disk drive connector (rear face)
Power connector
Unued
System cooling fan connector
The last digit number indicates fan number. Fan connectors 2, 8, 9, 10, and 12 are not used.
SGPIO1 connector
Connector for mother board
Connector for front panel board
SGPIO2 connector
Hard disk drive jumper switch
2-10 General Description
STANDARD FEATURES
High performance
„ Quad-core Intel® Xeon® processor
– N8100-1575F/1578F: 2GHz
– N8100-1576F/1579F: 2.26GHz
– N8100-1577F/1580F: 2.13GHz
„ High-speed memory access
(DDR3 800/1066)
„ High-speed 1000BASE-T/100BASETX/10BASE-T interface (2 ports)
(1Gbps/100Mbps/10Mbps supported)
„ High-speed disk access
(SATA and SAS (option))
„ Dual channel memory configuration
Expandability
Many Available Features
„ One PCI Express (x8) slot and
„ Power switch mask
one PCI Express (x8) slot (x16 connector)
„ Remote power-on feature
„ Large memory of up to 32GB
„ AC-LINK feature
(eight 4GB DIMMs)
„ Hot-swap hard disk drive supported
„ Two LAN ports for data transmission and
„ IPMI v2.0 compliant Baseboard
one port for management LAN
Management Controller (BMC)
(The management LAN port cannot be
used for data transmission.)
„ USB interface (USB 2.0)
High-reliability
„ Memory monitoring feature (error
correction/error detection)
„ Memory x4/x8 SDDC feature
„ Bus parity error detection
„ Temperature detection
„ Error notification
„ Cooling fan monitoring feature
„ Voltage monitoring feature
„ RAID System (SATA2/SAS)
„ BIOS password feature
„ Remote monitoring feature
„ Mechanical security lock
„ Redundant fan
Easy and Fine Setup
„ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER (system setup
utility)
„ SETUP (BIOS setup utility)
„ Parameter File Creator
Self-diagnosis
„ Power On Self-Test (POST)
„ Test and Diagnosis utility
Management Utilities
„ NEC ESMPRO
„ NEC EXPRESSSCOPE Engine 2
„ RAID System Management Utility
Maintenance Features
„ Off-line Maintenance Utility
„ Memory dump feature using the DUMP
switch
Power Saving Feature
„ Sleep feature
(available for Windows Server 2003)
„ Enhanced Intel SpeedStep® Technology
„ Enhanced Halt State supported
Space saving
„ 1U (approx. 44 mm) height
Can be installed in rack.
General Description 2-11
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN)
The remote power-on function turns on the server through a network. It sends a special packet from
the management computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off-powered.
To enable this feature, you must select "Enabled" for each submenu in the Power Management
Setup of the Advanced menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)
The remote power-on feature is not available in the following cases. Press the POWER switch once
to start the OS, and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure.
„
Abnormal previous system shut-down
„
No power supply to the server (due to turned-off breaker, disconnected power cord, power
blackout, etc.)
AC LINK Feature
When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit, the
server supports the power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS
to the server. The AC LINK feature can be enabled or disabled with Power Management Setup in
the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)
Security
The BIOS setup utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or accidental
access to the system. Once the security measures are enabled, access to the system is allowed only
after the user enters the correct password(s). For example:
„
Set and enable an administrative password.
„
Set and enable a user password
„
Check the user account when entering the BIOS setup utility or booting the system.
2-12 General Description
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The DVD of this server's accessories contains a setup utility called "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER".
The major functions of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are:
„
To install the Operating System.
"Express Setup" helps you to install the Windows Operating System. (See Chapter 5, 6, or
7.)
„
To diagnose the server.
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes System Diagnostics to check this server. (See Chapter
9.)
„
To create a driver disk.
Use this function to create "OEM-disk for Windows" used for a manual installation of
Windows. (See Chapter 5, 6, or 7.)
„
To update System BIOS
Use this function to update the server's system BIOS or firmware. (See Chapter 10.)
„
To update Windows system*
"Update the system" in the Autorun menu (See Chapter 8) updates the several drivers of
Windows on the server.
„
To install several management utilities*
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes the management utilities (NEC ESMPRO, Universal
RAID Utility and so on). You can install the applications from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
(See Chapter 8.)
„
To read several documents*
You can refer to the documents from the Autorun menu. (See Chapter 8.)
* These functions are available on Windows system.
NOTE: Some features among those listed above can be used from the
remote computer via cross cable (COM), or LAN. See Chapter 8 for
details.
NEC ESMPRO
The NEC ESMPRO is server management software that runs on the OS. The NEC ESMPRO
includes the NEC ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal and the NEC ESMPRO
Agent and NEC ESMPRO Agent Extension for the NEC Express server.
NOTE: For details of major functions of the NEC ESMPRO, system
configuration and setups with the NEC ESMPRO, see Chapter 8.
Available functions of the NEC ESMPRO depend on the OS you install.
Ask your service representative for details.
General Description 2-13
Maintenance Tools
The Maintenance Tools is used for maintenance and fault analysis of the server. This tool is usually
used by the service representative.
See Chapter 10 for details.
System Diagnostic Utility
The system diagnostic utility contained in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to detect
hardware failures. See Chapter 9 for details.
Remote Management
The server may be monitored and managed via LAN/WAN by using EXPRESSSCOPE Engine 2
and NEC ESMPRO Manager utility stored in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD.
The EXPRESSSCOPE Engine 2 provides the following features:
„
Monitoring of temperature, voltage, fans, and hard disk drives
„
Monitoring of power supply unit
„
Monitoring of hard disk drives
„
Generation of SEL (system event log) at occurrence of hardware failure
„
Monitoring of the system management watchdog timer
„
Monitoring of the periodic SMI timer
„
Remote management by using Web browser and Telnet/SSH client (e.g., resetting the
server, power on/off, viewing System Event Log (SEL))
„
Remote KVM and remote media features (A separately priced remote management license
is required.)
„
Remote management via LAN/WAN by using NEC ESMPRO Manager and centralized
management of several systems
For more information about remote management using Web browser, Telnet/SSH client, remote
KVM feature, and remote media feature, refer to the "EXPRESSSCOPE Engine 2 User's Guide"
stored in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD.
NOTE: To use the Remote Management Extended License (N8115-03),
visit our Web site to see the latest information about remote
console/remote media feature.
2-14 General Description
USING YOUR SERVER
This section describes basic operations of the server including how to use devices such as the
optical disk drive. See Appendix B for notes on using the disc and accessories including the
keyboard and the mouse.
POWER Switch
Use the POWER switch to turn on/off the server.
Power On
Press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis.
The POWER LED lights in green.
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
POWER LED
POWER switch
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
POWER LED
POWER switch
IMPORTANT:
„
If the power cord is connected to a power control device such as a
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply), make sure that the power
control device is powered.
„
Do not turn off the server until characters appear on the screen.
General Description 2-15
POST
POST (Power On Self-Test) is the self-diagnostic program stored in the system memory.
When you power on the server, the system automatically runs POST to check the mother board,
ECC memory module, CPU module, keyboard, and mouse. POST also displays messages of the
BIOS Setup utility, such as the start-up message, while in progress.
With the factory setup of the server, the NEC logo appears on the display unit while POST is in
progress. (To display the POST check results, press Esc.)
NOTE: You can set the POST check results to appear on the display
unit without pressing Esc. To do so, select "Enabled" for "Boot-time
Diagnostic Screen" under the Advanced menu of the BIOS setup utility.
You don't always need to check the POST check results. Check messages that POST displays when:
„
you use the NEC Express server for the first time.
„
the server appears to fail.
„
the server beeps for many times between power-on and OS start-up.
„
an error message appears on the display unit.
POST Execution Flow
The following describes the progress of POST in the chronological order.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not make key entries or perform mouse operations while POST
is in progress.
„
Some system configurations may display the message "Press Any
Key" to prompt a key entry. This message is driven by BIOS of an
installed optional board. Make sure to read the manual that comes
with the optional board before any key entry.
„
Powering on the server, after you installed or removed an optional
PCI board or moved it to another slot, may display the message that
indicates incorrect board configuration and suspend POST.
In such a case, press F1 to continue POST. Board configuration can
be made using the utility described later.
2-16 General Description
1.
After a few seconds from power-on, POST starts checking the memory. The count
message of the basic and expansion memory appears at top left on the display unit screen.
The memory check may takes a few minutes to complete depending on the memory size
of the server. Also, it may take approximately one minute for the screen display to appear
after rebooting the server.
2.
Some messages appear upon completion of the memory check. These messages appear to
indicate that the system has detected the CPU, keyboard, and mouse.
3.
After a few seconds, POST displays the following message prompting you to launch the
BIOS setup utility, stored in the system memory of the server. This message appears at
bottom left on the screen.
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or Press <F12> to Network
Launch the BIOS setup utility when you need to change the settings to meet the
requirements for the server. As long as the above message is not displayed with an error
message, you don't have to launch the utility. (Ignore the message. POST will
automatically proceed.)
To launch the BIOS setup utility, press F2 while the above message is displayed. See
Chapter 4 for setup and parameters.
The server automatically restarts POST all over again when you exit the BIOS setup
utility.
4.
If your server uses onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID), the
following message is displayed on the screen to prompt you to run the utility.
Press Ctrl-M to run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
Press Ctrl + M to run the utility. For detail explanation, see Chapter 4 for detail.
General Description 2-17
5.
If the server has an optional RAID controller or SCSI card, POST displays the message
prompting you to launch the RAID configuration utility or the SCSI BIOS setup utility.
Refer to the manual supplied with the RAID controller for detail instructions.
POST will automatically proceed a few seconds later.
6.
If you set a password entry using the BIOS setup utility, the password entry screen
appears upon successful completion of POST.
IMPORTANT: Do not set a password before installing an OS.
7.
The OS starts when POST completes.
POST Error Messages
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen or emits beep
code. See Chapter 10 for POST error codes.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before
consulting with your service representative. Alarm messages are useful
information for maintenance.
Power Off
Follow the procedure below to power off the server. If the power cord of the server is connected to a
UPS, refer to the manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls the
UPS.
IMPORTANT: Always allow POST to complete before turning off the
server.
1.
Shut down the OS.
2.
Press the POWER switch on the front of the server.
The POWER LED goes out.
3.
Power off peripheral devices.
2-18 General Description
Power-saving Mode
The server can be entered into standby state that hardly consumes electric power if the ACPI
compliant operating system is installed in your system.
Select "Standby" from OS shutdown menu, or press the POWER switch if the standby state is
enabled for POWER switch. (The POWER LED blinks.)
In the power-saving mode, the server retains the memory data and the status of the previous
operations.
To resume the original state, press the POWER switch again.
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
POWER switch
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
POWER switch
NOTE: The operational level in the power-saving mode depends on
the OS in use. (Available for Windows Server 2003.)
IMPORTANT: Do not change system configuration while turning into
the power-saving mode or in the power-saving mode. Otherwise, you
may fail to resume the original state.
General Description 2-19
Identification of Servers ~ UID Switch ~
An "UID (Unit ID) LED" is provided on the front panel and rear panel. If more than one server is
mounted in a single rack, the LED identifies the server you are going to maintain.
FRONT
3-5-inch hard
disk drive
model
UID LED
UID switch
2-5-inch hard
disk drive
model
UID LED
UID switch
REAR
UID switch / LED
2-20 General Description
The UID LED goes on when the UID (Unit ID) switch is pressed. It goes off when the switch is
pressed again.
The UID LED blinks upon reception of command from software.
Maintenance from the rear of the rack has to be carried out in a dark, narrow space. The interface
cable of a server or power supply unit in normal state may be disconnected by accident in this
situation. To prevent this problem, you should start maintenance after confirming the target server
by using the UID switch.
Chapter 3
Setting Up Your Server
This chapter describes how to set up your server appropriate for your system, on a step-by-step
basis.
3-2 Setting Up Your Server
SETUP FLOW
Follow the flowchart below to set up the server.
Unpacking the system
Unpack the server and accessories from the shipping carton box.
Installing optional devices
If you have purchased any optional device for the server, see Chapter 11 to install it.
Selecting the server site
Select a suitable site for the server.
Connecting peripheral devices
Connect peripheral devices to the server.
Connecting the power cord
Connect the power cord to the server.
Turning on the server
Power on the server to start software setups. Setups depend on the optional internal
devices installed and the peripheral devices connected.
Installing the operating system
Install an operating system to the server. See Chapter 5, 6, or 7.
Installing the utilities
Install the utilities in the provided NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD.
See Chapter 8.
Making backup copies of system information
After all the system setup procedures are completed, make backup copies of system
information.
System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after
replacing the system board.
Setting Up Your Server
3-3
UNPACKING THE SYSTEM
When you receive your system, inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking. If the shipping
boxes are damaged, note the damage, and if possible, photograph it for reference. After removing
the contents of the containers, keep the cartons and the packing materials. If the contents appear
damaged when you unpack the boxes, file a damage claim with the carrier immediately.
INSTALLING OPTIONAL DEVICES
To install any optional device, see Chapter 11, "Upgrading Your Server," for the installation
procedure. Proceed to the next section if you have no optional devices to install.
IMPORTANT: There are third-party products (memory modules, hard
disk drives, etc.) available for the server in the markets. However, NEC
recommends that you should use NEC products for stable operation.
NEC assumes no liability for data errors and failures due to malfunction
of the server resulted from installation of those third-party products.
3-4 Setting Up Your Server
SELECTING SERVER SITE
To use the server, install it on a standard EIA 19-inch rack assembly.
Refer to the documentation attached to the rack or contact your service representative for the
installation of the server on the rack.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-4 to 1-12
for details.
„
„
Do not use the server in any unapproved place.
Do not connect the ground line to a gas pipe.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these
instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 14 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Do not carry or install the server only by a single person.
Do not install the server where the load may be concentrated on a specific
point.
Do not install any component on the server only by a single person.
Insert the hinge pins completely.
Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.
Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.
Do not provide the wiring exceeding the rating power.
Do not use the server in a place where corrosive gases exist.
Setting Up Your Server
3-5
Do not install the rack in the places listed below. Installing the rack or mounting the server on the
rack in such a place may cause some malfunction to occur.
„
Narrow space from which devices cannot be pulled out from the rack completely
„
Place that cannot bear the total weights of the rack and devices mounted on the rack
„
Place where stabilizers cannot be installed or where the rack can be installed only after the
practice of proper earthquake-resistant construction
„
Place of uneven or slanting floor
„
Place of drastic temperature change (near a heater, air conditioner, or refrigerator)
„
Place where intense vibration may be generated
„
Place where corrosive gases (sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine,
ammonia, ozone, etc) exist.
Place where the air (or dust) includes components accelerating corrosion (ex. sulfur,
sodium chloride) or conductive metals.
Place where chemicals may be accidentally sprayed over
„
Place where a carpet not subject to anti-static process is laid.
„
Place where some objects may be fallen on the rack
„
Place near a device generating intense magnetic field (such as a TV, radio,
broadcast/communication antenna, power transmission wire, and electromagnetic crane) is
placed (If unavoidable, contact your service representative to request proper shield
construction.)
„
Place where the power cord of the server must be connected to an AC outlet that shares
the outlet of another device with large power consumption.
„
Place near equipment that generates power noise (e.g., contact spark at power-on/poweroff of commercial power supply through a relay). If you must install the server close to
such equipment, request your service representative for separate power cabling or noise
filter installation.
IMPORTANT: Increase in temperature within rack and air flow
If more than one server are installed on the rack or the ventilation
within the rack is not enough, the temperature in the rack may be raised
by the heat generated from the units to be higher than the operation
temperature of the server (10 to 35°C).
It causes the server to operate improperly. Review the air flow within
the rack or in the room and take sufficient measures so that the
temperature within the rack does not exceed the warranted temperature
range during the system operation.
The server takes in the air from the front and exhausts it to the rear.
3-6 Setting Up Your Server
INSTALLING THE SERVER
This subsection provides the instructions for installing the server into a rack cabinet. (This
subsection also describes the removal procedures.)
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages
1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
Do not use any rack which does not conform to the relevant standard.
Always use the server in the specified place.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
„
Do not install/remove the server in/from the rack only by a single person.
Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover removed.
Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
Do not apply any load on the server being pulled out from the rack.
Setting Up Your Server
3-7
Installation
This server can be installed in either the NEC rack or a third vendor's rack. Take the following steps
to install the server in the rack.
Preparation for installation
When shipped from factory, the left and right slide rails are fixed with tapes at the front and side
faces to prevent from falling off during transportation. Peel off the tape before you install the server
in the rack.
Tape
Removing rail assemblies
1.
Remove the sliding rails from left and right sides of the server.
3-8 Setting Up Your Server
2.
While pushing the unlock button on the front of the server, hold the rails and slowly move
them toward the rear of the server.
3.
Only the inner rails remain screwed to the server when the rail assemblies have been
removed.
Inner rail
IMPORTANT:
„
The removed rail assemblies are to be installed in the next step.
„
Be very careful not to get your finger caught in the levers or rails.
Setting Up Your Server
3-9
Installing rail assemblies
1.
Insert the square projection of the rail assembly into the angle hole on the 19-inch rack
until it is locked with clicking sound.
The figure below shows the right side (front) of the rack. Install the rail assemblies to the
right side (rear), and left side (front and rear) of the rack in the same procedure.
Make sure that the rail assembly is installed at the same level as the other slide rail
assembly already installed.
NOTES:
„
There may be some backlashes in the front and rear, however, it is
not a deficiency.
„
Make sure that the rail assembly is surely locked to the rack.
3-10 Setting Up Your Server
Installing the Server
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
1.
Do not lift the server only by a single person.
Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
Pull out the sliding rails (bearing portion) of the right and left rail assemblies toward the
front of the server.
Rail assembly
Sliding rail
2.
Securely hold the server and install it in the rack with at least two persons.
Rail assembly
Inner rail at server side
Setting Up Your Server
3-11
Firmly fit the inner rails on the sides of the server into the rail assemblies that are installed
on the rack, and then slowly push the server into the rack.
When the server is completely pushed into the rack, the server is locked.
IMPORTANT:
„
Be very careful not to get your finger caught in the levers or rails.
„
Insert both sides of inner rails straight into the rack.
„
Hold the thumbscrews on both sides of the server, and install the
server carefully while making sure the installation position.
NOTE: At the first installation, you may feel strong friction in pushing
because the mechanical components cannot be completely engaged
with each other. Push the server intensely.
3.
Make sure that the sliding rails move smoothly by pulling the server out of the rack and
pushing it in several times.
NOTE: To install the server in the location adjacent to the other device,
pay attention to interference. If the installing server disturbs the other
devices already been installed, adjust the position, and install the rail
assembly again.
3-12 Setting Up Your Server
Removal
Remove the server from the rack in the following procedure.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
„
„
„
Do not install/remove the server in/from the rack only by a single person.
Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
Do not apply any load on the server being pulled out from the rack.
Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.
Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.
Do not pull out the server from the rack while it is operating.
1.
Make sure that the server is off-powered, and disconnect the power cords and all the
interface cables from the server.
2.
While pushing the left and the right unlock buttons on the front of the server, pull out the
server from the rack slowly and carefully.
The server clicks to be latched.
3.
Firmly hold the server, and take it out from the rack.
IMPORTANT:
„
Pull out the server slowly holding the bottom of the server by at
least two persons.
„
Do not apply any load on the server pulled out from the rack. Doing
so may cause personal injury if the server drops.
„
Be very careful not to get your finger caught in the levers or rails.
Setting Up Your Server
4.
To remove the rail assembly, pull out the rail toward you while pushing the lever.
3-13
3-14 Setting Up Your Server
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Connect peripheral devices to the server. The server is provided with connectors for wide variety of
peripheral devices. The figure on the next page illustrates available peripheral devices for the server
in the standard configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices.
IMPORTANT: Consult with your service representative if you want:
– to connect the server to UPS or automatic power control unit
– to run the server by scheduled timer
– to connect the server to server switch unit and configure it
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages
1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
„
„
„
Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of
connections.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Use the authorized power cord only.
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server
plugged to a power source.
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.
Setting Up Your Server
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
USB device
Display unit
FRONT
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
USB device
Display unit
FRONT
Finally connect the
provided power cord
to the receptacle.
Device with the
serial interface
Network system on LAN
(connected via a hub)
REAR
Display unit
USB device
Network system on LAN
(connected via a hub)
for Management LAN
Cannot be used for data
transmission.
3-15
3-16 Setting Up Your Server
IMPORTANT:
„
Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection.
Connecting a powered peripheral device to the powered server will
cause malfunctions and failures.
„
To connect a third-party peripheral device or interface cable to the
server, consult with your service representative for availability of
such a device or cable. Some third-party devices may not be used
for the server.
„
To connect a SCSI device, an optional SCSI controller must be
installed. The total length of a cable (including the connection cable
in SCSI device) must be 3 m or shorter.
„
Do not connect the serial ports with the telephone line directly.
„
Do not connect any devices to the connectors not instructed in this
subsection. Doing so could damage the device, your server, or both.
If you install the server on the rack and connect peripherals, bundle the cables by using cable tie or
the like so that they are not entangled.
IMPORTANT: Form the cables in such a way that they will not come
into contact with the rack door or the guide rails on the sides of the
server.
Setting Up Your Server
3-17
CONNECTING POWER CORD
Connect the provided power cord to the server.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages
1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
Do not connect the ground line to gas pipe.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
„
Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of
connections.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Use the authorized power cord only.
1.
Plug the provided power cord into the power receptacle on the rear of the server.
2.
Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet.
3-18 Setting Up Your Server
To connect the power cord from the server to an interruptive power supply (UPS), use outlet socket
on the rear of the UPS. Refer to the manual that comes with the UPS for details.
<Example>
Computer interface port (COM)
Option slot
Reset button for
overload prevention
Outlet socket
Connector for TVSS device
Input connector
(NEMA5-15P)
Computer interface port (COM)
Voltage sensitivity setting button
When the power cord from the server to a UPS, change the BIOS setup of the server to link with
power supply from the UPS.
Change a parameter for "AC-LINK" under the Server menu of the BIOS SETUP utility. See Chapter
4 for details.
Setting Up Your Server
TURNING ON THE SERVER
Pressing the POWER switch at the front of the server turns on the server.
1.
Make sure that the floppy disk drive (if connected) contains no floppy disk.
2.
Power on the video display and any other external devices.
NOTE: If the power cord is connected to the power control unit such
as the UPS, turn on the power control unit.
3.
Press the POWER switch.
The POWER LEDs on the front and the rear of the server come on green. In a few
seconds, the NEC logo appears on the screen.
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
POWER LED
POWER switch
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
POWER LED
POWER switch
NOTE: Connect the power cord and wait about five seconds before
pressing the POWER switch. The POWER switch does not work in a
few seconds after connecting the power cord due to firmware start-up.
3-19
3-20 Setting Up Your Server
The Power On Self-Test (POST) runs while "NEC" logo is displayed to diagnose the system
hardware. See "POST" described later for details.
Upon completion of POST, the OS starts.
NOTE: When the POST detects any error, it displays an error message
and its measure on the display unit. See Chapter 10 for details of POST
error message.
Setting Up Your Server
INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM
See Chapter 5, 6, or 7 for installing the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
To install the other operating system listed above, contact your service representative.
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the
system date and time by using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP." See
Chapter 4 for detail.
INSTALLING UTILITIES
Install the utilities that come with the server. See Chapter 8 for details.
3-21
3-22 Setting Up Your Server
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the
server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive and restart the
system.
2.
Select [Tool menu (Normal mode)].
3.
Select [English].
4.
Select [Maintenance Utility].
5.
Select [System Information Management].
6.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
7.
Select [Save].
Chapter 4
Configuring Your Server
Configuration and setup utilities are used to change your system configuration. You can configure
your system, as well as option boards you may add to your system, using the BIOS SETUP Utility.
Several unique system parameters are configured using the BIOS SETUP, which is stored in the
system FLASH memory.
The RAID configuration utility configures the RAID System and logical drives connected to the
Onboard RAID controller.
If your system has been factory configured, the BIOS SETUP or RAID configuration utility do not
need to be run unless you want to change the password or security features, add certain types of
option boards or devices, upgrade your system board, or change the RAID configuration.
This chapter also provides information on several system configuration parameters that are set by
jumpers on the system board. However, these parameters do not usually require change.
SYSTEM BIOS (SETUP)
The SETUP utility is used to change system configuration parameters. This utility is pre-installed in
the flash memory of the server and ready to run.
The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best
conditions. Thus, you don't need to use the SETUP utility in most cases. However, you might wish
to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below.
IMPORTANT:
„
„
„
„
„
The SETUP utility is intended for system administrator use only.
The SETUP utility allows you to set a password. The server is
provided with two levels of password: Supervisor and User. With
the Supervisor password, you can view and change all system
parameters of the SETUP utility. With the User password, system
parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.
Do not set any password before installing the OS.
The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility. Dialog
boxes appear on your SETUP utility, thus, may differ from
descriptions in this manual. If you find anything unclear, see the
online help or ask your service representative.
Use the Exit menu when exiting the SETUP utility. Exiting the
utility with the POWER switch or reset operation causes the stored
parameters to lose.
4-2 Configuring Your Server
Starting SETUP Utility
Powering on the server starts POST (Power On Self-Test) and displays its check results. If the NEC
logo is displayed, press Esc.
After a few seconds, the following message appears at bottom left on the screen.
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or Press <F12> to Network
Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu.
If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility, the password entry screen appears.
Enter the password.
Enter password:[
]
Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the password correctly for three
consecutive times, the server halts. (You can no longer proceed.) Power off the server.
NOTE: The server is provided with two levels of password:
Supervisor and User. With the Supervisor password, you can view and
change all system parameters. With the User password, system
parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.
Configuring Your Server
4-3
Description on On-Screen Items and Key Usage
Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility. (Key functions are also listed at
the bottom of the screen.)
Indicates the current menu.
Indicates
there are
submenus.
Online
help
window
Setup item
menu(s)*
Parameter (high-lights upon selection) menu
Explanation of key
functions menu
* The menus displayed in gray indicates the information only or unchangeable secured by BIOS
password.
Cursor (↑, ↓):
Selects an item on the screen. The highlighted item is currently
selected.
Cursor (←, →):
Selects the Main, Advanced, Security, Server, Boot, or Exit menu.
– and +:
Changes the value (parameter) of the selected item. When a
submenu option (an option preceded by "³") is selected, these
keys are disabled.
Enter
Press Enter to select (determine) parameters.
Esc
Exit SETUP and return to the previous screen.
F9:
Sets the parameter of the currently displayed item back to the
factory set parameter.
F10:
Save and exit the SETUP utility.
4-4 Configuring Your Server
Configuration Examples
The following describes examples of configuration required to use software-link features or for
system operations.
Time and Date Settings
Select [Main] - [System Time].
Select [Main] - [System Date].
UPS
To link power supply with the UPS
„
To power on the server when power is supply from the UPS
Select [Server] - [AC LINK] - [Power On].
„
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS, when the
POWER switch is used to turn off the server.
Select [Server] - [AC LINK] - [Last State].
„
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS
Select [Server] - [AC LINK] - [Stay Off].
Boot
To change the boot order of devices connected to the server
Select [Boot] and specify the boot order.
To display POST check results
Select [Advanced] - [Boot-time Diagnostic Screen] - [Enabled].
You can also press Esc while the NEC logo is on the screen to display POST check
results.
To use the remote wakeup feature
Via modem:
Select [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [Wake on Ring] - [Enabled].
Via RTC alarm:
Select [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [Wake on RTC Alarm] - [Enabled].
To control from the HW console
Select [Server] - [Console Redirection] and set each item.
Configuring Your Server
4-5
Memory
To check the installed memory (DIMM board) status
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [CPU1_DIMM n Status] or
[CPU2_DIMM n Status], and check the status indications (n: 1, 2, 3, or 4).
The on-screen DIMM numbers and socket locations on the mother board are associated as
shown in the following figure.
CPU1_DIMM 2
CPU1_DIMM 4
CPU1_DIMM 1
CPU1_DIMM 3
CPU2
CPU1
CPU2_DIMM 3
CPU2_DIMM 1
CPU2_DIMM 4
CPU2_DIMM 2
REAR
FRONT
Mother board
To clear the memory (DIMM board) error information
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Memory Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.
CPU
To check the installed CPU status
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] and check the status indications.
To clear the CPU error information
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] - [Processor Retest] – [Yes] and reboot.
The on-screen CPU numbers and socket locations on the mother board are associated as
shown in the above figure.
4-6 Configuring Your Server
Keyboard
To set Numlock
Select [Advanced] - [Numlock] – [On]/[Off]. (Default: Off)
System Event Logs
To clear system event logs
Select [Server] - [Event Log Configuration] - [Clear All Event Logs] - [Enter] - [Yes].
Security
To set passwords on the BIOS
Select [Security] - [Set Supervisor Password] and enter a password.
Select [Security] - [Set User Password] and enter a password.
Set Supervisor password first, then User password.
External Devices
To setup I/O ports
Select [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] and set up each I/O port.
Internal Devices
To configure the internal PCI device
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] and setup each devices.
To install the RAID controller
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n Option ROM] - [Enabled].
n: PCI slot number
To clear the hardware configuration data (after installing/removing internal devices)
Select [Advanced] - [Reset Configuration Data] - [Yes] and reboot.
Configuring Your Server
Saving the Configuration Data
To save the current configuration data and exit from SETUP
Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes].
To discard changes to the current configuration data
Select [Exit] - [Exit Discarding Changes].
Select [Exit] - [Discard Changes].
To load the default setup (may differ from the factory-set value)
Select [Exit] - [Load Setup Defaults].
To save the current configuration data
Select [Exit] - [Save Changes].
To save the current configuration data as Custom Defaults
Select [Exit] - [Save Custom Defaults].
To load the Custom Defaults
Select [Exit] - [Load Custom Defaults].
4-7
4-8 Configuring Your Server
Menu and Parameter Descriptions
The SETUP utility has the following six major menus:
„
Main
„
Advanced
„
Security
„
Server
„
Boot
„
Exit
To set minute functions, select a submenu from the above menus. The following describes available
functions and parameters, as well as the factory-set, for each menu.
Configuring Your Server
4-9
Main
Option
System Time
System Date
Hard Disk Pre-Delay
SATA Port 0
SATA Port 1
SATA Port 2
SATA Port 3
SATA Port 4
SATA Port 5
Parameter
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
[Disabled]
3 seconds
6 seconds
9 seconds
12 seconds
15 seconds
21 seconds
30 seconds
Select submenu
Processor Settings
Select submenu
Language
[English]
Français
Description
Your Setting
Set the system time.
Set the system date.
When accessing the IDE device
for the first time during POST, the
system waits for the specified
time until the device becomes
ready.
Shows the information on the
device connected to each
channel on the submenu. The
settings of some items may be
changed. However, leave the
items as they are at the
shipment.
Shows the processor settings
submenu.
Select which language BIOS
displays.
[
IMPORTANT: Check and adjust the system clock before the
operation if any of the following conditions is applicable.
„ After carriage of device
„ After storage of device
„ After the device is entered into the pause state under the
environmental condition enduring device operation (temperature:
10°C - 35°C, humidity: 20% - 80%)
Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month. When the
system clock is installed in a system requiring high time precision, it is
recommended to use a time server (NTP server).
If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of
time in spite of adjustment, contact your service representative for
maintenance.
]: Factory-set
4-10 Configuring Your Server
Processor Settings
Option
Processor Speed
Setting
Processor 1 CPUID
Parameter
–
Processor 1 L2 Cache
Processor 1 L3 Cache
Processor 2 CPUID
–
–
Numeral
Disabled
Not Installed
Processor 2 L2 Cache
Processor 2 L3 Cache
Active Processor Cores
–
–
[ALL]
1
2
Disabled
[Enabled]
[Enabled]
Disabled
Hyper Threading
Technology
Execute Disable Bit
Numeral
Disabled
Not Installed
Intel SpeedStep(R)
Technology
[Enabled]
Disabled
Turbo Boost
Technology
C1 Enhanced Mode
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
Virtualization
Technology
Hardware Prefetcher
Adjacent Cache Line
Prefetch
Description
Displays clock speed for the processor.
(View only)
"Numeral" indictes CPU ID for
processor 1.
"Disabled" indicates that the processor
is defected.
"Not Installed" indicates that no
processor is installed.
(View only)
Displays L2 cache size for processor 1.
Displays L3 cache size for processor 1.
Displays CPU ID for processor 2, if
present.
"Disabled" indicates that the processor
is defected.
"Not Installed" indicates that no
processor is installed.
(View only)
Displays L2 cache size for processor.
Displays L3 cache size for processor.
Specifies the number of valid cores in
the processor.
Your Setting
Enables or disables the Intel(R) Hyper
Threading technology.
Enables or disables the Execute
Disable Bit feature.
Displayed only when the CPU supports
Execute Disable Bit.
Enables or disables the Intel(R)
SpeedStep feature.
Fixed to "Disabled" if the processor
does not support this feature.
Enables or disables the Intel(R) Turbo
Boost Technology.
Enables or disables the C1 Enhanced
Mode.
Enables or disables the Intel(R)
virtualization technology.
Enables or disables the hardware
prefetcher.
Enables or disables the optimization of
an access from memory to cache.
[
]: Factory-set
Configuring Your Server
4-11
Advanced
Option
Boot-time Diagnostic
Screen
Parameter
Enabled
[Disabled]
Reset Configuration Data
[No]
Yes
NumLock
On
[Off]
[Boot]
Halt
Memory/Processor Error
Description
When enabled, the BIOS will display
the POST progress.
When disabled, the BIOS will display
the NEC logo during POST.
Cannot be disabled during console
redirection.
Select "Yes" if you want to clear the
system configuration data during the
next boot. Automatically reset to
"No" in the next boot.
Enables or disables Numlock feature
at system startup.
If "Halt" is selected, the boot is
stopped when POST error occurs.
Your Setting
[
IMPORTANT: Be sure to take a note of boot priority before selecting
"Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data], because the information on boot
device will be cleared. Select [Exit Saving Changes] to restart the
system, run BIOS SETUP utility, and provide settings for boot device
order again.
]: Factory-set
4-12 Configuring Your Server
Memory Configuration
Option
Installed memory
Parameter
–
Available under
4GB
–
CPU1_DIMM 1-4
Status
CPU2_DIMM 1-4
Status
Normal
Disabled
Not installed
Error
Memory Retest
Yes
[No]
Extended RAM
Step
1MB
1KB
Every location
[Disabled]
Memory RAS
Mode
NUMA
configuration
[Independent]
LockStep
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Indicates the total capacity of the base
memory. (View only)
Indicates the capacity of memory
available in the area under 4GB. (View
only)
Indicates the current memory status.
"Normal" indicates the normal status,
"Disabled" indicates a memory error, "Not
installed" indicates no DIMM is installed,
and "Error" indicates the system is forcibly
started with memory error. (View only).
Causes BIOS to retest all memory on the
next boot. Automatically reset to "No" at
the next boot.
"1MB" indicates that the memory test is
done in the unit of 1MB. "1KB" indicates
that the memory test is done in the unit of
1KB. "Every location" tests every memory
location. "Disabled" indicates that only
memory initialization is done.
Only pressing Space is acceptable to
suspend the test during the memory test.
Specifies the memory RAS mode. See
"DIMM" in Chapter 11 for details.
Disables or enables Non-Uniform Memory
Access feature.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
Configuring Your Server
4-13
PCI Configuration
Option
PCI Slot 1-2
Option ROM
Parameter
[Enabled]
Disabled
Description
Disables or enables option ROM scan for
PCI board in PCI slot.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
IMPORTANT: If the RAID Controller, LAN board (network boot), or
Fibre Channel controller is connected with the hard disk drive that does
not contain an OS, set the parameter for "PCI Slot x Option ROM" (x:
slot containing the PCI card) to "Disabled".
– Onboard Video Controller submenu
Option
VGA Controller
Onboard VGA
Option ROM Scan
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
[Auto]
Force
Description
If Disabled, the BIOS will hold the
embedded chip in reset.
Selects whether the option ROM of onboard
video controller is executed automatically
for forcedly.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
– Onboard LAN 1-2 submenu
Option
LAN Controller 1-2
LAN1-2 Option
ROM Scan
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Description
Enables or disables onboard LAN controller.
Your Setting
Enables or disables an option ROM of
onboard LAN controller 1-2.
[
]: Factory-set
4-14 Configuring Your Server
Peripheral Configuration
IMPORTANT: Note that the interrupt and/or base I/O address are not
overlapped with others. If the value set for the interrupt or base I/O
address is used in another resource, the yellow asterisk (*) appears.
Reset any item with the yellow asterisk properly.
Option
Serial Port A
Base I/O
address
Interrupt
Serial Port B
Base I/O
address
Interrupt
USB 2.0 Controller
Serial ATA
SATA AHCI
SATA RAID
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
[3F8h]
2F8h
3E8h
2E8h
IRQ 3
[IRQ 4]
Disabled
[Enabled]
3F8h
[2F8h]
3E8h
2E8h
[IRQ 3]
IRQ 4
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Selects whether serial port A is enabled or
disabled.
Selects the base I/O address for serial port
A.
Your Setting
Selects the interrupt for a serial port A.
Selects whether serial port B is enabled or
disabled.
Selects the base I/O address for serial port
B.
Selects the interrupt for a serial port B.
Selects the USB 2.0 controller is enabled or
disabled.
Selects whether the serial ATA is enabled or
disabled.
Displays whether AHCI (Advanced Host
Controller Interface) is enabled or disabled.
(View only)
This option is enabled when SATA RAID is
enabled.
Displays the RAID configuration jumper
switch is set to [RAID enable] position or
not. (View only) See Chapter 4 for details.
[
IMPORTANT: To use the remote media feature of EXPRESSSCOPE
Engine 2, select "Enabled" for [USB 2.0 Controller].
]: Factory-set
Configuring Your Server
4-15
Advanced Chipset Control
Option
Multimedia Timer
Intel(R) I/OAT
Intel(R) VT-d
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Wake On
LAN/PME
Disabled
[Enabled]
Wake On Ring
[Disabled]
Enabled
Wake On RTC
Alarm
[Disabled]
Enabled
QPI Frequency
Selection
[Auto]
4.800 GT/s
5.866 GT/s
6.400 GT/s
Description
Specify whether the system supports
the multimedia timer feature.
Enables or disables the Intel(R)
Acceleration technology.
Specify whether the Intel(R)
Virtualization Technology for Directed
I/O feature is enabled or disabled. This
item appears only when the processor
supports this feature.
Specify whether the remote power-on
function through a network is enabled
or disabled.
Specify whether the remote power-on
function through a serial port (modem)
is enabled or disabled.
Specify whether the remote power-on
function by using RTC alarm feature is
enabled or disabled.
Selects QPI Bus Speed.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
IMPORTANT: If the AC power is turned off while the Wake On Ring
feature is enabled, this feature is disabled at the next system boot after
AC power-on. You need to press the Power switch to boot the system. If
the AC power is turned off, Wake On Ring feature on power
management chip is disabled until the next DC power-on.
4-16 Configuring Your Server
Security
Press Enter on "Set Supervisor Password" or "Set User Password," to display the password entry
screen.
Enter the passwords on the dialog box.
IMPORTANT:
„
User password can be set only when Supervisor password is already
set.
„
Set the passwords only after OS is installed.
„
If you forget the passwords, contact your service representative.
Option
User Password
Is
Supervisor
Password Is
Set User
Password
Parameter
Clear
Set
Clear
Set
Up to eight
alphanumerics
Set Supervisor
Password
Up to eight
alphanumerics
Password on
boot
[Disabled]
Enabled
Fixed disk boot
sector
[Normal]
Write Protect
Description
Indicates the user password setting
status.
Indicates the supervisor password
setting status.
Press Enter to display the user
password entry screen. For this
password, accessing to the SETUP
menu is restricted.
This setting can be done only on
login with the password input of
"Supervisor" at start of SETUP.
Press Enter to display the
supervisor password entry screen.
This password enables all the
SETUP menus to be accessed. This
setting can be done only on login
with the password input of
"Supervisor" at start of SETUP.
Specify whether the passwords are
entered or not on booting. At first,
the supervisor password must be
set. If the supervisor password is set
and this option is disabled, BIOS
determines that a user is booting.
Specify whether to permit writing into
boot sector of the IDE hard disk
drive or not. The server does not
support IDE hard disk drive.
Your Setting
Configuring Your Server
Option
Power Switch
Inhibit
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
Disable USB
Ports
[Disabled]
Front
Rear
Internal
Front + Rear
Front + Internal
Rear + Internal
Front + Rear + Internal
Description
Specify whether to enable or disable
the power switch feature.
(Forced shutdown (pressing the
POWER switch for at least four
seconds) feature is always
acceptable to the server.
Select the USB port to be disabled
or enabled.
4-17
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
Security Chip Configuration Submenu
Option
TPM Support
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
Current TPM
State
–
Change TPM
State
[No Change]
Enable & Activate
Deactivate & Disable
Clear
Description
Disables or enables TPM feature.
This option is selectable only when
the supervisor password is set.
Displays the current TPM state.
This option is displayed only when
"TPM Support" is set to "Enabled".
Changes TPM state.
This option is displayed and
selectable only when "TPM
Support" is set to "Enabled".
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
4-18 Configuring Your Server
IMPORTANT: If you select any parameter except for [No Change] to
change TPM State, a confirmation screen as shown below appears at
the end of POST after restarting the system. Select [Execute] on the
confirmation screen to determine the change you have made.
When [Enable & Activate] is selected:
Physical Presence operations
TPM configuration change was requested to
State:
Enable & Activate
Note:
This section will switch on the TPM
Reject
Execute
When [Deactivate & Disable] is selected:
Physical Presence operations
TPM configuration change was requested to
State:
Deactivate & Disable
Note:
This action will switch off the TPM
WARNING!!!
Doing so might prevent security applications
that rely on the TPM from functioning
as expected
Reject
Execute
When [Clear] is selected:
Physical Presence operations
TPM configuration change was requested to
State:
Clear
WARNING!!!
Clearing erases information stored on the TPM.
You will lose all created keys and access to
data encrypted by these keys.
Reject
Execute
Configuring Your Server
4-19
Server
Option
Assert NMI on
PERR
Assert NMI on
SERR
FRB-2 Policy
Boot Monitoring
Boot Monitoring
Policy
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disable FRB2 Timer
[Retry 3 Times]
Always Reset
[Disabled]
5 Minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
20 minutes
25 minutes
30 minutes
35 minutes
40 minutes
45 minutes
50 minutes
55 minutes
60 minutes
[Retry 3 Times]
Always Reset
Thermal Sensor
Disabled
[Enabled]
BMC IRQ
Disabled
[IRQ 11]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Post Error Pause
AC-LINK
Stay Off
[Last State]
Power On
Description
Specify whether to support PCI PERR
or not.
Specify whether to support PCI SERR
or not.
Specify whether the processor is
disabled or not when FRB level 2 error
occurred in BSP.
Specify whether to enable or disable
the boot monitoring function on
booting, or select the time limit for
timeout.
To use this function, install NEC
ESMPRO Agent. Set this item to
"Disabled" if the system is booted from
OS without installation of NEC
ESMPRO Agent.
Specify the processing at the
occurrence of timeout during boot
monitoring.
If [Retry 3 times] is selected, the
system is reset after the occurrence of
timeout and OS boot is retried up to
three times.
If [Always Reset] is selected, the
system is reset after the occurrence of
timeout and OS boot is retried
repeatedly.
* If no service partition exists in the
system, OS boot is retried
repeatedly from the system
partition.
Specify whether to enable or disable
the thermal sensor monitoring
function. If a thermal error is detected
with this item being set to "Enabled",
the system stops at the end of POST.
Specify whether to assign IRQ for
BMC.
Specify whether to stop the POST
once at the end of POST if an error
occurs during the POST.
Specify the state of power when the
AC power to the server is turn off once
and then on.
Your Setting
4-20 Configuring Your Server
Option
Power ON Delay
Time (Sec)
Parameter
[20] - 255
Platform Event
Filtering
Disabled
[Enabled]
Description
Specify the power on delay time within
the range between 20 and 255
seconds. The specified time is valid
when "Power On" or "Last State" is
specified for AC LINK.
Specify whether to enable or disable
the platform event filtering (PEF)
feature.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
IMPORTANT: To power on the server from the UPS (Uninterruptible
Power Supply), select [Server] - [AC LINK] - [Power On].
The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once and then on
again, depending on the setting of "AC LINK."
System status before AC power off
Operating
Aborting (DC power being off also)
Forced shutdown
Setting of AC LINK
Stay Off
Last State
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Power On
On
On
On
* Press the power switch continuously for four seconds or longer. This forcibly turns off the power.
Configuring Your Server
4-21
System Management Submenu
Option
BIOS Revision
Parameter
–
Board Part Number
–
Board Serial Number
–
System Part Number
–
System Serial Number
–
Chassis Part Number
–
Chassis Serial Number
–
Onboard LAN1 MAC
Address
Onboard LAN2 MAC
Address
Management LAN MAC
Address
BMC Device ID
BMC Device Revision
–
–
–
BMC Firmware Revision
–
SDR Revision
–
PIA Revision
–
–
–
Description
Displays the current BIOS revision.
(View only)
Displays the part number of mother
board. (View only)
Displays the serial number of mother
board. (View only)
Displays the part number of the
system. (View only)
Displays the serial number of the
system. (View only)
Displays the part number of the
chassis. (View only)
Displays the serial number of the
chassis. (View only)
Displays the MAC address of the
onboard LAN port 1. (View only)
Displays the MAC address of the
onboard LAN port 2. (View only)
Displays the MAC address of the
management LAN port. (View only)
Displays BMC device ID. (View only)
Displays BMC device revision. (View
only)
Displays BMC firmware revision.
(View only)
Displays revision of the sensor data
record.
Displays revision of the platform
information area. (View only)
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
4-22 Configuring Your Server
Console Redirection Submenu
Option
BIOS Redirection
Port
Parameter
[Disabled]
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
Baud Rate
9600
[19.2K]
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
None
Xon/Xoff
[CTS/RTS]
CTS/RTS+CD
PC ANSI
[VT100+]
VT-UTF8
Disabled
[Enabled]
Flow Control
Terminal Type
Continue
Redirection after
POST
Remote Console
Reset
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Enables or disables direct connection
from the management PC that uses
NEC ESMPRO Manager or hyper
terminal through the port specified
here.
Specify the baud rate used for the
interface with the remote console
connected.
Your Setting
Specify the flow control method.
Specify the type of remote console.
Specify whether to continue console
redirection feature after completion of
POST.
Specify whether to enable or disable
resetting by Escape command (Esc R)
sent from the remote console.
If the server is connected with the
management PC that uses NEC
ESMPRO Manager, this option is
always enabled even if "Disabled" is
specified here.
[
]: Factory-set
Configuring Your Server
4-23
BMC LAN Configuration Submenu
Option
Shared BMC LAN
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
LAN Connection
Type
IP Address
[Auto Negotiation]
100Mbps Full Duplex
100Mbps Half Duplex
10Mbps Full Duplex
10Mbps Half Duplex
[192.168.001.001]
Subnet Mask
[255.255.255.000]
Default Gateway
[000.000.000.000]
DHCP
[Disabled]
Enabled
Web Interface
HTTP
–
[Disabled]
Enabled
[80]
HTTP Port
Number
HTTPS
HTTPS Port
Number
[Disabled]
Enabled
[443]
Command Line
Interface
Telnet
–
Telnet Port
Number
SSH
[23]
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
SSH Port Number
[22]
Clear BMC
Configuration
[Enter]
Description
Set to "Disabled" if the
management LAN port is used for
management LAN.
Change to "Enabled" to use the
LAN port 2 for management LAN.
If set to "Enabled", the
management LAN port becomes
unavailable.
Specify the connection type for
management LAN port.
Your Setting
Specify an IP address for
management LAN.
Specify a subnet mask for
management LAN.
Specify a default gateway for
management LAN.
Set to [Enabled] to obtain an IP
address from DHCP server
automatically. If you intend to
specify an IP address manually,
set to [Disabled].
–
Set to [Enabled] to use HTTP
communication for Web interface.
Specify the TCP port number
which the management LAN uses
for HTTP communication.
Set to [Enabled] to use HTTPS
communication for Web interface.
Specify the TCP port number
which the management LAN uses
for HTTPS communication.
–
Set to [Enabled] to use Telnet
communication as a command line
interface.
Specify the TCP port number to be
used for Telnet communication.
Set to [Enabled] to use SSH
communication as a command line
interface.
Specify the TCP port number to be
used for SSH communication.
Press Enter and select "Yes" to
initialize the BMC configuration.
[
]: Factory-set
4-24 Configuring Your Server
IMPORTANT: Notes on performing Clear BMC Configuration
„
Executing "Load Setup Defaults" in BIOS SETUP utility does not
restore the default value for settings related to management LAN of
BMC. To restore the default value, you need to execute Clear BMC
Configuration.
„
It takes about several tens seconds until initialization completes
after execution of Clear BMC Configuration.
„
Executing Clear BMC Configuration also clears settings made in
NEC ESMPRO Agent Extension. Before execution, be sure to make
backup copy of setting information of NEC ESMPRO Agent
Extension.
NOTE: Executing [Save Custom Defaults/Load Custom Defaults] of
BIOS SETUP does not save the settings you have made in BMC LAN
Configuration menu.
Event Log Configuration Submenu
Option
Auto Clear Event
Logs
Parameter
Enabled
[Disabled]
Clear All Event
Logs
Enter
Description
If set to "Enabled", logs are
automatically cleared when the error
log area is fulfilled.
Press Enter and select "Yes" to clear
the system event log.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
System Event Log Submenu
If you select "System Event Log" on the "Event Log Configuration" of Server menu, the System
Event Log submenu appears.
Use ↑, ↓, +, –, Home, or End to view the newer or older system event logs recorded.
NOTE: If a lot of event logs are recorded in the system, it takes about
two minutes at the longest until they are displayed on the screen.
Configuring Your Server
4-25
Boot
If you move the cursor to the position of "Boot," the Boot menu appears, which is used to set the
boot priority.
Indication
USB CDROM
IDE CD
USB FDC
USB KEY
IDE HDD
USB HDD
PCI SCSI
PCI BEV
1.
Device
USB CD-ROM drive
ATAPI CD-ROM (including factory-installed optical disk drive)
USB floppy disk drive
USB flash memory device
IDE hard disk drives
USB hard disk drives
Internal hard disk drives installed in your system ("Software RAID" is
displayed in the RAID configuration.)
IBA GE Slot xxxx
Onboard LAN.
LAN1: Slot 0C00, LAN2: Slot 0C01
Other indication
Optional PCI board connected to the riser card.
When BIOS detects a bootable device, it displays the information on the device in the
relevant indication.
To boot the server from a desired device, the device must be registered as a boot device.
(Up to eight boot devices can be registered.)
2.
Pressing X after selecting a device allows the selected device to be registered as a boot
device or deleted from the registration.
With eight boot devices being registered, any other device cannot be registered as a boot
device even if you press X. To register a device as a boot device newly, first delete the
registration of a device registered as a boot device but not booted any more.
3.
You can change the boot priority (first to eighth) of each device by using ↑, ↓, + and/or –.
To change the priority of a device, move the cursor to the device by using the ↑ or ↓, and
press + or –.
4-26 Configuring Your Server
Exit
The options on the menu are described below.
Exit Saving Changes
Exit after writing all modified BIOS SETUP item values to CMOS.
Exit Discarding Changes
Exit leaving CMOS unmodified. User is prompted if any of the setup fields ware modified.
Load Setup Defaults
Load default values for all BIOS SETUP items.
Load Custom Defaults
Load custom defaults for BIOS SETUP options.
Save Custom Defaults
Saves the current values as custom defaults. The “Load Custom Defaults” menu appears on the
screen after saving the custom default values.
Discard Changes
Read the previous values of the all BIOS SETUP items from CMOS.
Save Changes
Write all BIOS SETUP item values to CMOS.
Configuring Your Server
4-27
RAID SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This section describes how to use the internal hard disk drives as RAID System by Onboard RAID
Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID).
About the optional RAID Controller (N8103-115/116A/117A/118A), refer to the documents
provided with optional RAID Controller.
IMPORTANT: When using Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded
MegaRAID) or Optional RAID Controller (N8103-115/N8103116A/117A/118A), do not let the system enter hibernation or standby
mode.
RAID
Overview of RAID System
What is RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks)?
RAID is an abbreviation for "Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks". The RAID technology allows
more than one hard disk drive (HDD) to be handled collectively.
In actual, RAID can configure more than one HDDs as a single array (disk group) to operate the
HDDs effectively. This can bring higher performance than a single HDD of a large capacity.
The Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) has a feature to divide a single disk
group into several logical drives (virtual disks). The RAID controller recognizes these virtual disks
as if it were a single hard disk drive. The RAID Controller accesses to more than one hard disk
drive configuring a disk group in parallel.
Some RAID levels can recover data from remaining data and parity by using rebuild feature if an
error occurs in a single HDD. This can provide high reliability for the system.
4-28 Configuring Your Server
RAID Levels
The record mode enabling the RAID feature includes several levels. Among the levels, the Onboard
RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) supports RAID levels 0 and 1. The number of hard
disk drives required to create a disk group varies depending on the RAID level as shown in the table
below.
„
3.5-inch disk model
RAID level
RAID 0
RAID 1
RAID 10
„
Number of required HDDs
Min.
Max.
1
4
2
2 (or 4 when configuring 2 sets of RAID 1 disk groups)
4
4
2.5-inch disk model
RAID level
RAID 0
RAID 1
RAID 10
Number of required HDDs
Min.
Max.
1
6
2
2 (or 6 when configuring 3 sets of RAID 1 disk groups)
4
4
NOTES:
„
For details of the RAID levels, see "RAID Levels" described later in
this chapter.
„
If five or six hard disk drives are installed in 2.5-inch hard disk
drive model, only four of them will be shown on POST or BIOS
SETUP menu. Use the RAID utility to know the actual number of
hard disk drives installed.
Disk Group
A disk group is configured with more than one HDDs.
The allowable number of disk groups is equal to the number of HDDs.
The figure below shows a sample configuration. The two HDDs are connected to the Onboard
RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID), creating one disk group (DG).
RAID Controller
Disk Group 0: 160 GB
HDD 1
(80 GB)
HDD 2
(80 GB)
Configuring Your Server
4-29
Virtual Disk
Virtual disk is a logical drive defined in disk group. It is recognized as a physical drive by OS. The
allowable number of virtual disks is up to 16 per disk group, or up to 64 per controller.
The figure below shows a sample configuration in which the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI
Embedded MegaRAID) is connected with two HDDs, creating one Disk Group. Two RAID1
virtual disks (VD) are defined in the Disk Group.
RAID Controller
DG0 160 GB
VD0-1
50 GB
VD0-2
50 GB
VD0 (RAID1)
50 GB
VD1-1
30 GB
VD1-2
30 GB
VD1 (RAID1)
30 GB
HDD 1
(80 GB)
HDD 2
(80 GB)
Parity
The parity means redundant data. A single set of redundant data is created from the data saved in
more than one HDD.
The created redundant data is used for data recovery when a HDD is defected.
Hot-Swap
The hot-swap enables a HDD to be removed (or replaced) under system operation.
Hot-Spare
The hot-spare is prepared as an auxiliary HDD substituting for a defected HDD included in a logical
drive which is configured at a redundant RAID level. Detecting a HDD fault, the system
disconnects the HDD (or makes it offline) and starts rebuild using the hot-spare.
4-30 Configuring Your Server
RAID Levels
Characteristics of RAID Levels
The table below lists the characteristics of the RAID levels.
Level
RAID0
Function
Striping
Redundancy
No
RAID1
Mirroring
Yes
Characteristics
• Data read/write at the highest rate
• Largest capacity
• Capacity:
(capacity of single HDD) × (number of HDDs)
• Two HDDs required
• Capacity: capacity of single HDD
RAID0
In RAID0, data to be recorded is distributed to HDDs. The mode is called "striping".
In the figure below, data is recorded in stripe 1 (disk 1), stripe 2 (disk 2), and stripe 3 (disk 3)… in
the order. Because RAID0 allows all HDDs to be accessed collectively, it can provide the best disk
access performance.
IMPORTANT: RAID0 cannot have data redundancy. If a HDD is
defected, the data saved in the HDD cannot be recovered.
RAID Controller
HDD 1
HDD 2
HDD 3
Stripe 1
Stripe 2
Stripe 3
Stripe 4
Stripe 5
Stripe 6
Configuring Your Server
4-31
RAID1
In the RAID1 level, data saved in a HDD is written to another HDD without change. The mode is
called "mirroring".
When data is written onto a single HDD, the same data is written onto another HDD. If either of the
HDDs is defected, the other HDD containing the same data can substitute for the defected HDD.
Thus the system can continue to operate without interruption.
RAID Controller
HDD 1
HDD 2
Stripe 1
Stripe 1
Stripe 2
Stripe 2
4-32 Configuring Your Server
Configuration by Onboard RAID Controller
This section describes how to use the internal hard disk drives as RAID System by Onboard RAID
Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID).
Installing the Hard Disk Drives
Install the required number of hard disk drives for the desired RAID level to your server. See
Chapter 11 for installation procedure.
IMPORTANT: Use hard disk drives of the same revolution. In
addition, use two hard disk drives of the same capacity if you are going
to configure RAID1.
Enabling RAID Feature
To configure a hard disk drive as RAID System, change the RAID System configuration jumper
switch on mother board.
NOTE: The RAID System is factory-set to "Enabled".
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-4
to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-4
to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Never attempt to lift the server only by two or less persons.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed.
Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
Note high temperature.
Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.
Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.
Configuring Your Server
4-33
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" as described in Chapter 11 of this
guide to prepare.
2.
Remove the server from the rack (see Chapter 11).
3.
Remove the top cover (see Chapter 11).
4.
Remove the riser card (see Chapter 11).
5.
Locate the position of the RAID configuration jumper switch on the mother board.
6.
Change jumper switch setting.
Setting RAID configuration jumper switch allows internal hard disk drives to be
recognized as RAID drives. Set the jumper switch as shown in the below.
– Jumper pin on mother board (SATA_RAID)
SW-RAID configuration jumper switch
1
2
3
Enable (1-2)
– Backplane board
Controller configuration jumper switch
3
2
1
Mother board (1-2)
Use LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility to configure the RAID System. See
Chapter 4 for details.
7.
Install the components you have removed in earlier steps.
4-34 Configuring Your Server
Running LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
1.
When the following screen appears after you have powered on the server, press Esc.
The POST screen appears.
2.
Check the description as shown below on the POST screen, then press Ctrl + M.
Press <Ctrl><M> or Enter to Run LSI Software Configuration Utility
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility starts.
IMPORTANT: If you fail to press Ctrl + M and the system proceeds
without displaying the following menu screen, restart the system, and
press Ctrl + M on POST screen.
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility TOP Menu (Management Menu)
Configuring Your Server
To quit the utility, press Esc in the TOP menu of LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility.
When a confirmation message appears, select [Yes].
When the above message appears, press Ctrl + Alt + Delete.
The server is rebooted.
4-35
4-36 Configuring Your Server
Menu Tree
+: Selection/execution parameter ‘: Setting parameter. •: Information display
>: Can be set (modified) after creation of virtual drive
Menu
+Configure
+Easy Configuration
+New Configuration
+View/Add Configuration
+Clear Configuration
+Select Boot Drive
+Initialize
+Objects
+Adapter
+Sel. Adapter
‘Rebuild Rate
‘Chk Const Rate
‘FGI Rate
‘BGI Rate
‘Disk WC
‘Read Ahead
‘Bios State
‘Cont on Error
‘Fast Init
‘Auto Rebuild
‘Auto Resume
‘Disk Coercion
‘Factory Default
+Virtual Drive
+Virtual Drives
+Initialize
+Check Consistency
+View/Update Parameters
• RAID
• SIZE
• Stripe SIZE
• #Stripes
• State
• Spans
• Disk WC
• Read Ahead
+Physical Drive
+Physical Drive Selection Menu
+Make HotSpare
+Force Online
+Force Offline
+Drive Properties
• Device Type
• Capacity
• Product ID
• Revision No.
+Rebuild
+Check Consistency
Description
Performs Configuration settings
Set configuration (Using fixed value)
Set new configuration
Additional setting / viewing configuration
Clear configuration
Chose Bootable Virtual Drive
Initialize virtual drive
Various settings
Set RAID Controller
Clear configuration
30
30
30
30
Off
On
Enable
Yes
Enable
On
Enable
1GB
Set factory default value
Virtual drive operation
Select virtual drive (when multiple virtual drives exist)
Initialize virtual drive
Check virtual drive redundancy
Display virtual drive information
Display RAID level
Display virtual drive capacity
Display stripe size
Display the number of hard disk drives in virtual drive
Display virtual drive status
Display span setting
Off: Write through
On: Write back
Display read ahead setting
Physical drive operation
Select physical drive
Set as hot-spare disk for auto rebuilding
Make a disk online
Make a disk offline
Display hard disk drive information
Hard disk drive type
Hard disk drive capacity
Hard disk drive model
Hard disk drive revision
Perform rebuilding
Perform virtual drive redundancy check
Configuring Your Server
4-37
Operating Procedures for Configuration Utility
Creating/Adding Configuration
Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
Set new configuration information (pack/virtual drive settings)
Check the virtual drive settings
Initialize virtual drive
Perform Consistency Check
Exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
1.
Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility.
2.
Select "Configure" → "New Configuration" from the TOP menu (Management Menu).
Select "View/add Configuration" to add configuration.
IMPORTANT:
„
Creating a configuration using "New Configuration" menu clears
the existing configuration information. To add configuration
information to the existing configuration, select "View/add
Configuration."
„
You cannot create Striping of RAID1 or set the virtual drive
capacity on "Easy Configuration" menu.
Use "New Configuration" or "View/Add Configuration" instead.
4-38 Configuring Your Server
3.
When a confirmation message (Proceed?) is displayed, select "Yes."
The SCAN DEVICE starts (scanning information is displayed at the bottom of the screen).
Upon completion of SCAN DEVICE, the "New Configuration - ARRAY SELECTION
MENU" screen appears.
4.
Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive to be packed by using cursor key and then press
Space to select the hard disk drive.
The display for the selected hard disk drive changes from READY to ONLINE.
5.
Press F10 to set "Select Configurable Array(s)".
6.
Press Space.
SPAN-1 is set.
Configuring Your Server
7.
4-39
Press F10 to create virtual drive.
The "Virtual Drives Configure" screen appears. (The figure below shows an example of
RAID1 configured with two hard disk drives.)
8.
Select "RAID," "Size", "DWC", "RA", or "Span" by using cursor keys. Then press Enter
to fix the selection and set each value.
(1) "RAID": Sets RAID level.
Parameter
0
1
10
Remarks
RAID0
RAID1
Striping of RAID1
The selectable RAID level varies depending on the number of hard disk drives
that configure a pack.
(2) "Size": Sets virtual drive size.
Up to 8 virtual drives can be created per RAID Controller.
(3) "DWC": Sets parameter for Disk Write Cache.
Parameter
Off
On *1
Remarks
Write through
Write back
*1 Recommended setting.
"Write-back On" enables good performance, however, cache data may be lost at
an unexpected power failure. "Write-back Off" reduces performance by
approximately 50%.
(4) "RA": Sets parameter for Read Ahead.
Parameter
Off
On
Remarks
Does not perform read ahead.
Performs read ahead. (Recommended)
4-40 Configuring Your Server
(5) "Span: Sets Span.
Parameter
SPAN=NO
SPAN=YES
Remarks
Does not set span. (Recommended)
Sets span.
When performing SPAN, create two or more sets of the same pack at pack creation,
as shown in the figure below.
STRIPING of RAID1
9.
When all settings are completed, select "Accept" and then press Enter to create virtual
drive.
The created virtual drive is displayed in the "Virtual Drive Configured" screen.
10.
After creating virtual drive, press Esc to close the screen.
Go back to the "Save Configuration?" screen and then select "Yes" to save the
configuration.
11.
When the confirmation message shows that the configuration has been saved, press Esc
to return to the TOP menu screen.
12.
On the TOP menu screen, select "Objects" → "Virtual Drive" → "View/Update
Parameters" to check virtual drive information.
13.
Select "Initialize" in the TOP menu screen.
14.
When the "Virtual Drives" screen appears, move the cursor to the virtual drive to be
initialized, and press Space.
The virtual drive is selected.
15.
After selecting virtual drive, press F10 to start initialization.
A confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes" to start initialization.
When the progress bar in the "Initialize Virtual Drive Progress" screen indicates 100%,
initialization is completed.
Configuring Your Server
16.
4-41
Execute Check Consistency on the virtual drive that has been initialized.
See "Check Consistency" for details.
17.
Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit from LSI Software RAID Configuration
Utility.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to execute Check Consistency after creating
configuration.
4-42 Configuring Your Server
Manual Rebuild
Replace hard disk drive
Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
Execute rebuilding
Exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
1.
Replace a hard disk drive and turn on the server.
2.
Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility.
3.
Select "Rebuild" from the TOP menu.
The "Rebuild – PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU" screen appears.
4.
Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive displaying "FAIL," and then press Space to
select it. Multiple hard disk drives can be selected (simultaneous rebuilding.)
The "FAIL" indication for the hard disk drive selected starts blinking.
5.
When hard disk drive has been selected, press F10 to start rebuilding.
6.
When confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes".
The rebuild process starts.
When the progress bar in the "Rebuild Physical Drives in Progress" screen indicates 100%,
rebuilding is completed.
7.
Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility.
Configuring Your Server
Setting Hot Spare
Install a hard disk drive
Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
Set for hot spare.
Exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
1.
Install a hard disk drive to be used as hot spare, and then turn on the server.
2.
Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility.
3.
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" from the TOP menu.
The "Objects - PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU" screen appears.
4.
Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive to be used as hot spare and press Enter.
5.
The "Port #X" screen appears. Select "Make HotSpare."
6.
A confirmation screen appears. Select "Yes."
The hard disk drive indication is changed to "HOTSP."
4-43
4-44 Configuring Your Server
7.
Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility.
IMPORTANT:
„
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → "Port #X" → "Force
Offline" to cancel the hot spare setting.
„
When two or more hard disk drives (of the same capacity) are
assigned as hot spare, rebuilding is performed in order starting from
the one with the smaller CH number/ID number.
Configuring Your Server
4-45
Check Consistency
Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
Perform Check Consistency
Exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
1.
Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility.
2.
Select "Check Consistency" from the TOP menu.
The "Virtual Drives" screen appears.
3.
Move the cursor onto the virtual drive to be checked, and press Space to select it.
4.
When virtual drive has been selected, press F10 to start consistency check.
5.
A confirmation screen for execution appears. Select "Yes".
The consistency check starts.
When the progress bar in the "Check Consistency Progress" screen indicates 100%, the
consistency check is completed.
6.
Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to execute Check Consistency after creating
configuration.
4-46 Configuring Your Server
Others
„
Clear Configuration
Clears configuration information. Select "Configure" → "Clear Configuration" from the
TOP menu. Executing "Clear Configuration" clears all configuration information on the
RAID Controller and hard disk drives. The configuration information on all channels of
the RAID Controller is also cleared.
NOTES:
„
„
When configuration information on the RAID Controller and that on
the hard disk drive do not match (excluding at replacement of faulty
RAID Controller), configuration mail fail if you select the
configuration information on the RAID Controller. In this case,
execute "Clear Configuration" to create configuration again.
„
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility cannot delete each virtual
drive. Use Universal RAID Utility instead.
Force Online
Puts a hard disk drive being in the FAIL status online.
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → (select hard disk drive) → "Force Online" from
the TOP menu.
„
Rebuild Rate
Sets the Rebuild Rate.
Select "Objects" → "Adapter" → "Sel. Adapter" → "Rebuild Rate" from the TOP menu.
Available value is between 0% and 100%. Default value (recommended) is 30%.
„
Hard disk drive information
Checks hard disk drive information.
Select "Objects" → "Physical Drive" → (select hard disk drive) → "Drive Properties"
from the TOP menu.
Configuring Your Server
4-47
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility and Universal RAID Utility
You can use Universal RAID Utility for configuration and management, monitoring of RAID
System after start up operating system.
The point to keep in mind when I use Universal RAID Utility together with LSI Software RAID
Configuration Utility is as follows.
Terms
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility and Universal RAID Utility are different in term. When
you use Universal RAID Utility together with LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility, please
convert terms by the following list.
Term of LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
Adapter
Logical Drive
Array
Physical Drive
Term of Universal RAID Utility
RAID Controller
Logical Drive
Disk Array
Physical Device
Number and ID
The number to manage each component of disk array of Universal RAID Utility is different to LSI
Software RAID Configuration Utility.
Adapter and RAID Controller
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility manages Adapter by a number beginning with 0. You can
see a number of Adapter where [Sel. Adapter] in [Objects] menu. Universal RAID Utility manages
RAID Controller by a number beginning with 1. You can see a number of RAID Controller where
[Number] in the property of RAID Controller on RAID Viewer or [RAID Controller #X] in the
property of RAID Controller on raidcmd.
Also, you can see the number of Adapter managed by LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
where [ID] in the property of RAID Controller by Universal RAID Utility.
Logical Drive
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility manages Logical Drive by a number beginning with 0.
You can see a number of Logical Drive where [Logical Drives] in [Objects] menu.
Universal RAID Utility manages Logical Drive by a number beginning with 1. You can see a
number of Logical Drive where [Number] in the property of Logical Drive on RAID Viewer or
[RAID Controller #X Logical Drive #Y] in the property of Logical Drive on raidcmd.
Also, you can see the number of Logical Drive managed by LSI Software RAID Configuration
Utility where [ID] in the property of Logical Drive by Universal RAID Utility.
4-48 Configuring Your Server
Disk Array
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility manages Disk Array by a number beginning with 0. You
can see a number of Disk Array where [Axx] of [Objects - PHYSICAL DRIVE SELECTION
MENU] DG X] in [Objects] menu.
Universal RAID Utility manages Disk Array by a number beginning with 1. You can see a number
of Disk Array where [Disk Array] in the property of Logical Drive on RAID Viewer or [RAID
Controller #X Disk Array #Y] in the property of Disk Array on raidcmd.
Physical Drive and Physical Device
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility manages Physical Drive by ID. You can see ID of
Physical Drive where [Port #] of [Objects - PHYSICAL DRIVE SELECTION MENU] DG X] in
[Objects] menu.
Universal RAID Utility manages Physical Device by a number beginning with 1 and ID. The ID is
same value of ID on LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility. You can see a number and ID of
Physical Device where [Number] and [ID] in the property of Physical Device on RAID Viewer or
[RAID Controller #X Physical Device #Y] and [ID] in the property of Physical Device on raidcmd.
Setting of Priority
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility displays and sets Rebuild Priority and Consistency Check
Priority of RAID Controller by percentage. But, Universal RAID Utility uses three levels as
High/Middle/Low for them.
The setting value of LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility and the display level of Universal
RAID Utility
Item
Rebuild Priority
Rebuild Rate (LSI Software
RAID Configuration Utility)
Consistency Check Priority
Chk Const Rate (LSI Software
RAID Configuration Utility)
Setting value of LSI Software
RAID Configuration Utility
15 to 100
8 to 14
0 to 7
15 to 100
8 to 14
0 to 7
Universal RAID Utility Level
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
Configuring Your Server
The setting level of Universal RAID Utility and the setting value
Item
Rebuild Priority
Rebuild Rate (LSI Software
RAID Configuration Utility)
Consistency Check Priority
Chk Const Rate (LSI Software
RAID Configuration Utility)
Setting level of Universal
RAID Utility
High
Middle
Low
High
Middle
Low
Setting value
90
50
10
90
50
10
NOTES:
„
LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility can set FGI Rate
(Foreground Initialize) and BGI Rate (Background Initialize
Priority). But Universal RAID Utility can't set it.
„
Universal RAID Utility can set Initialization Priority, but it can't set
it to the LSI Embedded MegaRAID. Therefore, Universal RAID
Utility doesn't display [Initialization Priority] in the property of
RAID Controller. Also, it will fail that you change the Initialization
Priority by raidcmd.
4-49
4-50 Configuring Your Server
CONFIGURING MOTHER BOARD JUMPERS
With the BIOS SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect the data stored in the server
against access from unauthorized users. When you forget the passwords, however, you may want
clear them. The following describes how to clear these passwords. You can also use the following
procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server.
IMPORTANT:
„
Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set configuration data.
„
Do not change any other switch settings. Any change may cause the
server to fail or malfunction.
Mother board
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Protect
1
2
3
Clear
Pin for protecting/
clearing the CMOS data
Clear
Protect
Pin for protecting/
clearing the password
Configuring Your Server
4-51
The following describe the clearing procedure.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages
1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
Make sure to complete installation.
Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components.
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.
IMPORTANT: Components inside the server are easily affected by
static electricity. Handle a component after making your body contact
with a metallic frame section of the server to discharge the static
electricity on your body. Do not make bare hands contact with
terminals and components. See "Static Precautions" in this chapter for
details of the static electricity.
4-52 Configuring Your Server
Clearing CMOS Data
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" in Chapter 11 to prepare.
2.
Remove the server from the rack (see Chapter 11).
3.
Remove the top cover (see Chapter 11).
4.
Locate the position of the jumpers on the mother board you are changing.
5.
Change jumper switch setting from "Protect" to "Clear".
6.
Wait for a while (about 5 seconds), and then reinstall the jumper block to the default
position.
7.
Reassemble the server, and press the POWER switch to turn on the server.
8.
Press F2 during POST to run the BIOS Setup utility, and execute [Load Setup Defaults]
on the Exit menu.
Clearing Password
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" in Chapter 11 to prepare.
2.
Remove the server from the rack (see Chapter 11).
3.
Remove the top cover (see Chapter 11).
4.
Locate the position of the jumpers on the mother board you are changing.
5.
Change jumper switch setting from "Protect" to "Clear".
6.
Reassemble the server, and press the POWER switch to turn on the server.
7.
Press F2 during POST to run the BIOS Setup utility, set the password again, and execute
[Exit Saving Changes] on the Exit menu.
Chapter 5
Installing Windows Server 2008
This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2008.
NOTICE
Read the following notes or information before installing the Windows Server 2008.
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your server supports the following optional
boards;
„
Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup
„
– N8103-116A RAID Controller (128MB, RAID0/1)*
– N8103-117A RAID Controller (128MB, RAID0/1/5/6)*
– N8103-118A RAID Controller (256MB, RAID0/1/5/6)*
– Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID)
Other controllers
– N8103-104A SAS Controller*
– N8103-107 SCSI Controller*
– N8103-115 RAID Controller (512MB, RAID0/1/5/6)*
– N8190-127 Fibre Channel Controller*
– N8190-131 Fibre Channel Controller (2ch)*
* Option
5-2 Installing Windows Server 2008
Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the
OS installation media and Service Pack.
„
Windows Server 2008
– OS installation media (with Service Pack 2)
– OS installation media (No Service Pack) + Service Pack 2
– OS installation media (No Service Pack)
Installing Service Pack
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached to your system,
prepare it by yourself.
Updating System
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update the system" in the Autorun Menu.
Installing on the Mirrored Volume
When re-installing the OS to a hard disk drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk, only the
simple dynamic volume is available for installation.
If you want to install the OS on a volume that is mirrored using [Disk Management], invalidate the
mirroring and reset to the basic disk before the installation, and validate the mirroring again after the
installation.
You can create, invalidate, or delete the mirror volume by using [Disk Management] in [Computer
Management].
Mounting MO Device
Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation.
About Removable Media
Do not set removable media, such as DAT, into the device mounted on your server during the OS
installation.
Floppy Disk Drive
The internal floppy disk drive is not included in your system at the standard configuration. Prepare
the optional USB floppy disk drive if necessary.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-3
About the System Partition Size
The system partition size can be calculated from the following formula.
When the system is Windows Server 2008 64-bit (x64) Edition:
Required partition size =
size required to install OS + paging file size + dump file size + application size
Size required to install OS
= 11,600MB (Full Installation)
12,300MB (Full Installation with Service Pack 2)
16,720MB (Full Installation + Service Pack 2)
or
= 4,100MB (Server Core Installation)
12,300MB (Server Core Installation with Service
Pack 2)
9,300MB (Server Core Installation + Service Pack 2)
Paging file size (recommended) = Installed memory size x 1.5
Dump file size
= Installed memory size + 300MB
Application size
= Required size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
Regardless of the size of the mounted memory, or the Write
debugging information (type of memory dump), the maximum size
of the dump file is 'The size of the mounted memory + 300MB'.
„
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary
space to the partition to install these programs.
Example:
The partition size required for a system with an installed memory size of 512 MB and a full
installation of the operating system:
11,600MB + (512MB x 1.5) + (512MB + 300MB) + application size
= 13,180MB + application size.
5-4 Installing Windows Server 2008
If the provided partition size is smaller than that required to install the OS and paging file, expand
the partition size or utilize a larger disk. If your system does not have a sufficient dump file size,
divide the required file space into multiple disks by performing the steps below:
1.
Set the system partition size to a size sufficient to install the OS and paging file.
2.
See "Setting for Solving Problems" (on page 5-34) to write the debug information of the
dump file onto another disk.
If there is not enough disk space to write the debug information, add another disk for the dump file.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-5
When the system is Windows Server 2008 32-bit (x86) Edition
Required partition size =
size required to install OS + paging file size + dump file size + application size
Size required to install OS
= 6,300MB (Full Installation)
9,300MB (Full Installation with Service Pack 2)
9,400MB (Full Installation + Service Pack 2)
or
= 2,200MB (Server Core Installation)
9,300MB (Server Core Installation with Service Pack
2)
5,300MB (Server Core Installation + Service Pack 2)
Paging file size (recommended) = Installed memory size x 1.5
Dump file size
= Installed memory size + 300MB
Application size
= Required size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify
4095MB for the paging file size.
„
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB
memory mounted is '2048MB + 300MB'.
„
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary
space to the partition to install these programs.
Example:
The partition size required for a system with an installed memory size of 512 MB and a full
installation of the operating system:
6,300MB + (512MB x 1.5) + 512MB + 300MB + application size
= 7,880MB + application size.
5-6 Installing Windows Server 2008
If the partition where the operating system is installed is smaller than that required to install the OS
and paging file, expand the partition size or utilize a larger disk. If your system does not have a
sufficient dump file size, divide the required file space into multiple disks by performing the steps
below:
1.
Set the partition size to a size sufficient to install the OS and paging file.
2.
See "Setting for Solving Problems" to write the debug information of the dump file onto
another disk.
If there is not enough disk space to write the debug information, add another disk for the dump file.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-7
INSTALLING Windows Server 2008
Preparations for Installation
„
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD
„
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard (DVD-ROM)
„
User's Guide
„
Getting Started
„
Windows Server 2008 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER
Windows Server 2008 Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2008.
IMPORTANT: The installation procedure depends on your
environment.
Follow steps below appropriate to your environment.
1.
Turn on your system.
IMPORTANT: To install Windows Server 2008, you may need to
update BIOS. To check if your system needs a BIOS update, go to:
http://www.nec.com/express/.
2.
Insert the Windows Server 2008 DVD-ROM into your DVD-ROM drive.
3.
Restart the system.
To restart the system, press Ctrl + Alt + Del or turn off the system once, and then turn it
on again.
IMPORTANT: When prompted to [press any key to boot from CD or
DVD], press Enter while the message is displayed. If the Windows
installation screen (shown in step 4) does not appear, turn off the system,
and then turn it on again.
The DVD-ROM starts. A message "Windows is loading files …" appears.
5-8 Installing Windows Server 2008
4.
Select a language and other options from the drop-down lists, and then click [Next].
5.
Click the [Install now
The installation starts.
] button.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-9
6.
Enter your product key, and then click [Next].
7.
Select the edition of the Windows operating system that you purchased.
Select [I have selected the edition of Windows that I purchased], and then click [Next].
You will see only possible editions that have been determined by Windows based on the
key you entered in step 6.
NOTE: The Windows versions listed on the screen vary depending
on the Windows Server 2008 DVD-ROM you are using.
5-10 Installing Windows Server 2008
8.
Read the license terms carefully. If you agree, select [I accept the license terms], and then
click [Next].
9.
Select the type of installation you want.
[Custom (advanced)] is selected below.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-11
10.
You will be asked, "Where do you want to install Windows?"
‰ If the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) or the RAID
Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A) is used:
Remove the Backup DVD-ROM or Windows Server 2008 DVD-ROM and NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER DVD, and select [Load Driver].
Click [Browse], and go to Step 11.
‰ If the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) or the RAID
Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A) is not used:
Go to Step 14.
11.
The folder reference dialog box appears. Select a path to the foldr in the NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER DVD, and then click [OK].
‰ If the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) is used:
– Windows Server 2008 64-bit (x64) Edition:
<drive letter>:\013\win\winnt\oemfd\ws2008x64\fd1\megasr1
– Windows Server 2008 32-bit (x86) Edition:
<drive letter>:\013\win\winnt\oemfd\ws2008\fd1\megasr1
‰ If the RAID Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A) is used:
– Windows Server 2008 64-bit (x64) Edition:
<drive letter>:\013\win\winnt\oemfd\ws2008x64\fd1\megasas
– Windows Server 2008 32-bit (x86) Edition:
<drive letter>:\013\win\winnt\oemfd\ws2008\fd1\megasas
12.
A list of drivers is displayed.
Select the following driver, and click [OK]. Go to Step 13.
‰ If the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) is used:
[LSI Embedded MegaRAID]
‰ If the RAID Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A) is used:
[LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS 8708EM2 RAID Controller]
13.
Remove the EXPRESSBUILDER and set Backup DVD-ROM or Windows Server 2008
DVD-ROM.
5-12 Installing Windows Server 2008
14.
Select the disk where a partition will be created, and then click [Drive Option].
IMPORTANT: If the partition has already been created, go to step
17.
15.
Click [New], enter a partition size, and then click [Apply].
16.
Select the partition created in step 15, and then click [Format].
17.
Select the partition created, and then click [Next].
When the following message appears, the installation starts automatically.
NOTE: If the disk drive contains NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD,
you will be prompted to replace a media with that for OS installation.
Insert the install media according to the on-screen message.
Install Windows – Insert Disc
Please insert Windows installation disc 1.
OK
Cancel
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-13
18.
Log on to the system. The steps vary depending on the edition you selected in step 7.
If you have selected a full installation
1)
After a full installation of Windows Server 2008 is completed, the following dialog
box will prompt you to set or change the password before you log on. Click [OK].
2)
Change the password, and then click the
button.
NOTE: Administrator password that satisfy the next condition, are
required.
3)
„
More than 6 characters
„
Contains characters from three of the following categories
(numbers, uppercase letters, lowercase letters, and signs).
When the following message appears, click [OK] to log on.
5-14 Installing Windows Server 2008
4)
On the [Initial Configuration Tasks] window, enter user information.
If you have selected a Server Core installation
1)
After a Server Core installation of Windows Server 2008 is completed, press Ctrl +
Alt + Del.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-15
2)
Select [Other User].
3)
Log on to the system as an administrator.
You need not enter your password in this dialog box. Click the
4)
button.
Before you log on, you will be prompted to change the password. Click [OK].
5-16 Installing Windows Server 2008
5)
Change the password, and then click the
button.
NOTE: Administrator password that satisfy the next condition, are
required.
„
More than 6 characters
„
Contains characters from three of the following categories
(numbers, uppercase letters, lowercase letters, and signs).
6)
When the following message appears, click [OK].
7)
At the command prompt, enter user information.
NOTE: For more detailed procedure, see the "Microsoft Windows
Server 2008 Step-By-Step Guide".
After installations is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Setup of Device Driver
(Normally Install in Server)" and "Updating the System" of this chapter.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-17
Procedure for License Authentication
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label
in which the product key contained in Windows Server 2008 is written.
NOTES:
„
Execute the activation within 60 days.
„
COA label may be attached to your server.
Updating the System
IMPORTANT: "Updating the System" disables the Scalable
Networking Pack (SNP) function.
The setting of SNP function may affect the system performance, so
please refer to the attention of SNP detail in the following site before
setting it.
http://www.nec.com/global/prod/express/
Update the system in the situation below:
„
CPU is expanded (expanded to single processor to multi-processor).
„
Modified system configuration.
„
Recovered the system using recovery process.
The system update brings the correction program provided by Microsoft to be applied to reinforce
the system security.
The system update is recommended.
5-18 Installing Windows Server 2008
Application Process of "Updating the System"
"Updating the System" applies the drivers necessary for NEC Express5800 Series.
1.
Log on to the system using an administrator account.
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive.
3.
Hereinafter, the setup process is depending on the content selected at [Installing Windows
Server 2008], follow each of the instructions.
– If you have selected a full installation
If the menu is displayed, click [Setup Windows] and click [Update the system].
NOTE: Right-clicking on the Menu produces the same outcome.
– If you have selected a Server Core installation
1) Execute the following command line from command prompt to specify the optical
disk drive (e.g. D drive).
cd /d d:\013\win\winnt\bin\oschk\
C:\Users\administrator>cd /d D:\013\win\winnt\bin\oschk
2) Type following command line and press Enter.
oschk.bat
D:\013\win\winnt\bin\oschk>oschk.bat
4.
The following box appears.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-19
5.
Read the message, and then click [OK].
The update starts.
NOTE: The following box appears during the update if you have
deployed a full installation of Windows Server 2008. Wait until the
update completes.
6.
When the following message appears, click [OK] to restart the system.
The system has been updated.
5-20 Installing Windows Server 2008
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please
refer to the document attached to the driver.
LAN Driver and PROSet
The LAN driver and PROSet have been installed automatically while your system was being
updated in the previous section.
NOTE: To change the LAN driver and PROSet settings, log on to the
system from a local console using an administrator account. Remotely
changing the settings by using the operating system’s remote desktop
feature is not supported.
Using N8104-125 Adapter after System Update
To use the N8104-125 Adapter after updating your system, you must first uninstall the LAN driver
and PROSet, and then update your system with the N8104-125 Adapter connected.
For a server running a full installation
1.
Remove a team of network adapters.
NOTE: Before you remove, note down the current settings (e.g. IP
addresses) of the standard and optional adapters teamed for network
redundancy.
Configure the settings after reinstalling the LAN driver and PROSet.
To remove the team, see "Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive
Load Balancing (ALB)".
2.
In [Control Panel], click [Uninstall Program].
3.
Double-click [Intel(R) Network Connections 14.4.0.0].
Intel(R) Network Connections (Remove Options)] appears.
4.
In [Remove Options], click [Remove].
[Intel(R) Network Connections - Remove Software] appears.
5.
Select [Yes].
The uninstallation starts automatically.
6.
When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] appears, click [Finish].
7.
Restart the system.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-21
For a server running a Server Core installation
1.
Note down the current settings (e.g. IP addresses) of the standard and optional adapters
teamed for network redundancy before uninstalling LAN driver.
Configure the settings after reinstalling the LAN driver.
2.
At a command prompt, run dxsetup.exe in your removable medium containing the Driver
Set.
– Windows Server 2008 64-bit (x64) Editions:
<drive letter>: \013\win\winnt\ws2008x64\r1441\apps\prosetdx\vistax64\dxsetup.exe
– Windows Server 2008 32-bit (x86) Editions:
<drive letter>: \013\win\winnt\ws2008\r1441\apps\prosetdx\vista32\dxsetup.exe
3.
In [IntelR Network Connections - InstallShield Wizard], click [Next].
4.
Select [Remove], and click [Next].
5.
Click [Remove].
Uninstallation starts automatically.
6.
When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] appears, click [Finish].
7.
Restart the system.
5-22 Installing Windows Server 2008
Network Driver
Specify the details of network driver.
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed
and Duplex mode need to be specified manually.
1.
Open the [Device Manager]
2.
Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click the [Link Speed] and specify the [Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4.
Click [OK].
5.
Restart the system.
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding
Services].
[Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that the
computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or receives. This tool is
valuable when analyzing network trouble. For information on how to
install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems" described later
in this chapter.
Re-install the Network Driver
The network driver will be installed automatically.
Optional Network Board Driver (N8104-122/125/126)
The following optional network boards are available for the N8104-122/125/126.
To use the N8104-125 Adapter, see" Using N8104-125 Adapter after System Update" in the
previous page.
The drivers for other network boards are automatically installed by Windows Plug-and-Play. You do
not need to install them manually.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-23
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter
and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group
when any trouble occurred on that adapter.
Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter
and enhances the throughput by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters.
This feature includes AFT feature.
IMPORTANT:
„
AFT/ALB setting must be done after System Update completed.
„
All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must
exist on the same LAN. If they are connected to the separate
switches, they will not work normally.
„
The adapters specified as a group of Adaptive Load Balancing
(ALB) can be connected to only Switching Hub.
„
When exchange the mother board or option network card, make
sure to remove the adapter team before exchanges and recreate the
adapter team after exchange complete.
„
Please confirm the port setting of switching hub (L2) matches the
server network adapter Teaming mode.
„
Teaming is not supported with Windows Server Core.
Setup Teaming
1.
Open the [Device Manager].
2.
Open [Network adapters] → [Intel(R) xxx] properties.
3.
Click [Teaming] tab and check the [Team this adapter with other adapters] check box.
Click [New Team].
4.
Fill the name of the team in [Specify a name for the team] and click [Next].
5.
Include the adapter to the team and click [Next].
6.
Select a team type ([Adapter Fault Tolerance]/[Adaptive Load Balancing]).
Click [Next].
7.
Click [Finish].
8.
Click [TEAM: "Team name"] from [Device manager] → [Network adapters] to modify
the team. Click [Settings] tab and click [Modify Team] button.
5-24 Installing Windows Server 2008
9.
Refer to the following procedure to set the team member adapter priority status.
– Set Primary
Point the adapter and click [Set Primary] button.
– Set Secondary
Point the adapter and click [Set Secondary] button.
NOTE: Adapter priority config can be confirmed by the following
procedure:
1. Click [TEAM: "Team name"] from [Device manager] → [Network
adapters].
2. Click [Settings] and confirm Adapters in team list.
10.
Click [Test Switch] → [Run test] to confirm the adapter team is properly setup.
Confirm the result in [Test results].
11.
Restart the system.
Remove Team
1.
Open the [Device Manager].
2.
Click [Network adapters], and open [TEAM: "Team name"] properties.
3.
Click [Setting] tab.
4.
Click [Remove Team] button.
5.
Click [Yes] to the message.
6.
Confirm [TEAM: "Team name"] adapter is not existing in [Network adapters] tree and
restart the system.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-25
Setting WOL
Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL.
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Point to [Network adapters] and double click [Intel(R) 82567LM-2 Gigabit Network
Connection]/[Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection] to open the adapter
[Properties].
3.
Click [Power Management] tab and change setting in [Wake On LAN] according to the
following list.
Setting item
Change setting
"Wake On Directed Packet"
"Wake On Magic Packet"
"Wake on Magic Packet from power off state"
"Wake on Link"
ON
ON
ON
OFF
NOTES:
„
[Power Saver Options] setting is not necessary to change.
„
Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are
executed.
IMPORTANT: The parameters of [Wake On LAN] will not exist, if
the network ports are not available for WOL.
4.
Click [OK].
5.
Restart the system.
5-26 Installing Windows Server 2008
Graphics Accelerator Driver
If you use standard graphics accelerator drivers, update your system with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system.
Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically.
NOTE: <Windows Server 2008>
The graphics accelerator driver is supported only on a server running a
full installation. Use VGA on a server running a Server Core
installation.
Please follow the following procedure when you want to reinstall the driver individually.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive.
If the autorun menu is displayed, close menu screen.
2.
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "Install.bat" in the following directory.
– Windows Server 2008 64-bit (x64)Edition:
\013\win\winnt\ws2008x64\video
– Windows Server 2008 32-bit (x86)Edition:
\013\win\winnt\ws2008\video
4.
Follow the message to continue the installation.
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to
continue.
5.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive, restart the
system.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-27
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-107)
If you use the SCSI Controller N8103-107, you do not need to install the driver manually. It is
automatically installed by Windows Plug-and-Play.
Installing SAS Controller Driver (N8103-104A)
If you use the SAS Controller N8103-104A, you do not need to install the driver manually. It is
automatically installed by Windows Plug-and-Play.
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-115)
If you use the RAID Controller N8103-115, you do not need to install the driver manually. It is
automatically installed by Windows Plug-and-Play.
Installing Fibre Channel Controller Driver (N8190-127/131)
If you use the Fibre Channel Controller N8190-127/131, you do not need to install the driver
manually. It is automatically installed by Windows Plug-and-Play.
5-28 Installing Windows Server 2008
About Windows Activation
Windows Server 2008 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2008.
Windows activation process is as follows.
For a server running a full installation
1.
Go to the Start menu, and in the Run dialog box, type slui, and press Enter.
IMPORTANT: If the following message appears, Windows has
already been activated on your system. Click [Close] to exit.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-29
2.
In the following screen, click [Type a different product key].
3.
Type the product key shown on your COA label, and click [Next].
5-30 Installing Windows Server 2008
4.
Activate Windows.
The Windows activation is complete.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-31
For a server running a Server Core installation
1.
At the command prompt, type slmgr –dli, and press Enter.
IMPORTANT: If the following message appears, Windows has
already been activated on your system. Click
to exit.
2.
Type slmgr –ipk <PID>, and press Enter.
* PID is your product key on the COA label.
3.
Type slmgr –dti to obtain an installation ID for Windows activation, and press Enter.
4.
See "%systemroot%\system32\slui\phone.inf" for the phone number of the Microsoft
customer service.
5.
Call the above number, inform the representative of the installation ID which you
obtained in step 3, and receive a confirmation ID.
5-32 Installing Windows Server 2008
6.
At the command prompt, type slmgr –atp <CID>, and press Enter.
* CID is the confirmation ID that you received from the call center.
The Windows activation is complete.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-33
The procedure to set PAE option
If your 32-bit system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB, setting PAE option will enable the
system to be installed with over 4GB of memory.
IMPORTANT: "PAE option" is not supported on Windows Server
2008 Standard.
In Windows Server 2008 system, the PAE option can be set by using Bcdedit.exe.
The setting procedure is as follows.
1.
Click [Run] on [Start] menu.
2.
Type "cmd.exe" in the [Open:] box to start command prompt.
3.
Execute following command line.
bcdedit /set pae forceenable
4.
Restart the system.
The setting mentioned above enables after reboot.
5.
Execute following command line on command prompt.
bcdedit
Confirm "pae ForceEnable" exists in "Windows boot loader".
The setting for PAE option is now completed.
Refer following site about Bcdedit.exe.
"Boot Configuration Data Editor Frequently Asked Questions"
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc721886(WS.10).aspx
5-34 Installing Windows Server 2008
SETTING FOR SOLVING PROBLEMS
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely
and as soon as possible when it should occur.
Memory Dump (Debug Information)
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the
server.
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump
„
The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of
collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specify the
memory dump.
„
If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, the
message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory
may appear, but continue to start the system. If you restart the
system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.
Follow the procedure below to specify.
1.
Select [Control Panel] and click [System].
The [System] dialog box appears.
2.
Click [Advanced system settings].
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.
3.
Select [Advanced] tab.
Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.
4.
Modify [Dump file:] in the [Write debugging information] group box.
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive with the file name "MEMORY.DMP".
D:\MEMORY.DMP
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-35
IMPORTANT:
Windows Server 2008 64-bit (x64) Edition
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug
information is recommended. If the mounted memory size is larger
than 2GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that
specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 300MB".
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.
Windows Server 2008 32-bit (x86) Edition
5.
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug
information is recommended. If the mounted memory size is larger
than 2GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that
specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 300MB"(In
case the memory capacity is more than 2GB, a free area of
"2048+300MB" or more).
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.
Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.
The [Performance Options] window appears.
6.
Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.
7.
Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.
8.
Uncheck the [Automatically manage paging file size for all drives] box, and check
[Custom size].
5-36 Installing Windows Server 2008
9.
On the [Paging file size for each drive] box, specify as follows:
– A value larger than the recommended size shown in [Total paging file size for all
drives] for [Initial size]
– A value larger than the [Initial size] for [Maximum size]
Then click [Set].
IMPORTANT:
10.
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "About the
System Partition Size" described earlier.
„
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit
the new memory size.
Click [OK].
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification.
In such case, follow the message to restart the system.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-37
How to Create a User-mode Process Dump File
"User-mode Process Dump" is the file that records information when any application error occurs.
When any application error occurs, do not close the pop-up window that notifies the error, and then
collect a dump using following process.
1.
Right-click a blank part of the taskbar and click [Task Manager], or press Ctrl + Shift +
Esc to start [Task Manager].
2.
Click [Processes] tab.
3.
Right-click on process name that you want to collect dump, and then click [Create Dump
File].
4.
The dump file is stored in following directory.
C:\Users\<User Name>\AppData\Local\Temp
NOTE: The folder may be treated as hidden folder. If the folder does
not appear, run Explorer and select [Tools] - [Folder Options...] [View], and check to [Show hidden files and folders].
When the User-mode Process Dump is created, pick up the file from the directory
described in Step 4.
Refer to Knowledge Base of Microsoft web-site for more information about the Usermode Process Dump file collection.
"How to create a user-mode process dump file in Windows Server 2008"
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/949180/en-us
NOTE: For Windows Server 2008, Dr. Watson is replaced by
[Problem Reports and Solutions], therefore, you can not collect the
Crash Dump file by existing Dr. Watson.
The above process provides you the information same level as the
Crash Dump file.
5-38 Installing Windows Server 2008
Network Monitor
Network Monitor Setup
Microsoft Network Monitor allows you to examine and troubleshoot network problems.
NOTE: Windows Server 2008 does not provide Network Monitor. To
use Network Monitor on Windows Server 2008, install Network
Monitor by following the steps below.
1.
Download Microsoft Network Monitor from the following web site:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/955998/en-us
2.
Run the downloaded file to start the installer.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install Network Monitor.
NOTE: If a Security Alert appears, click [Run]. Select [Complete] for
a setup format.
3.
Network Monitor is installed.
NOTE: To remove Network Monitor, go to [Programs and Features].
Network Trace Capture
1.
On the Start menu, start Microsoft Network Monitor.
2.
On [Start Page], select [Create a new capture tab...] or select [New] in the [File] menu,
and click [Capture...].
A new tab for capturing a network trace is created.
3.
On the [Select Networks] window, select a network you want to capture a trace.
4.
On the [Capture] menu, click [Start] to start capturing a network trace.
5.
On the [Capture] menu, click [Stop] to stop capturing a network trace.
6.
On the [File] menu, select [Save As...].
The [Save As] window appears. Select [All captured frames] from [Frame selection], and
enter the names of a folder and a file.
NOTE: The default folder name is:
C:\Users\<User name>\Documents\Network Monitor 3\Captures
7.
Click Save to create the file in the folder selected in step 6.
Installing Windows Server 2008 5-39
Re-installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist
[Before Re-installing the Operation System]
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.
[Re-installing the Operation System]
1.
Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.
2.
Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following
message appears:
Where do you want to install Windows?
* Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume.
Confirm the proper drive letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.
3.
Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described in this manual.
4.
The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the previous system.
If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according to the "Procedure for
Modifying the Drive Letter".
[Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter]
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot be modified with the following
procedure.
1.
Click Start menu, right-click [Computer], and specify [Manage] to start [Server Manager].
2.
Specify the [Storage] - [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.
3.
Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the [Change Drive
Letter and Paths...].
4.
Click [Change...].
5.
Choose the [Assign the following drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to
assign.
6.
Click [OK].
7.
If the following message appears, click [Yes].
Some programs that rely on drive letters might not run correctly.
Do you want to continue?
8.
Close the [Server Manager].
5-40 Installing Windows Server 2008
INSTALLING MAINTENANCE UTILITIES
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD. See Chapter 8
for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations.
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the
server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
1.
Insert the "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" DVD into the optical disk drive and restart the
system.
2.
Select [Tool menu (Normal mode)].
3.
Select [English].
4.
Select [Maintenance Utility].
5.
Select [System Information Management].
6.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
7.
Select [Save].
Chapter 6
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
NOTICE
Read the following notes or information before installing the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your server supports the following optional
boards;
„
Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup
„
– N8103-116A RAID Controller (128MB, RAID0/1)*
– N8103-117A RAID Controller (128MB, RAID0/1/5/6)*
– N8103-118A RAID Controller (256MB, RAID0/1/5/6)*
– Onboard RAID Controller(LSI Embedded MegaRAID)
Other controllers
– N8103-104A SAS Controller*
– N8103-107 SCSI Controller*
– N8103-115 RAID Controller (512MB, RAID0/1/5/6)*
* Option
6-2 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the
OS installation media and Service Pack.
„
Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition
– OS installation media (with Service Pack 2)
– OS installation media (No Service Pack) + Service Pack 2
– OS installation media (No Service Pack)
Installing Service Pack
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached to your system,
prepare it by yourself.
Updating System
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update the system" in the Autorun Menu.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to
Dynamic Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk drive
upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:
„
Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS
newly.
„
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.
Mounting MO Device
Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation.
About Removable Media
Do not set removable media, such as DAT, into the device mounted on your server during the OS
installation.
Floppy Disk Drive
The internal floppy disk drive is not included in your system at the standard configuration. Prepare
the optional USB floppy disk drive if necessary.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-3
About the System Partition Size
The system partition size can be calculated from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size
+ Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 4100MB (Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions)
= 4100MB (Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions with
ServicePack 2)
= 5900MB (Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions +
Service Pack 2 CD-ROM)
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5
Dump file Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 1MB
Application Size
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
Regardless of the size of the mounted memory, or the Write
debugging information (type of memory dump), the maximum size
of the dump file is 'The size of the mounted memory + 1MB'.
„
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary
space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the partition size will be calculated by the
above formula as follows:
4100MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 1MB) + Application Size
= 5381MB + Application Size
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.
1.
Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
2.
See "Setting for Solving Problems" (on page 6-30) and set that debugging information
(equivalent to the dump file size) is to be written to a separate disk.
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written,
then after installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size",
install an additional new disk.)
6-4 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
INSTALLING Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Preparations for Installation
„
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD
„
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition (CD-ROM)
„
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Service Pack 2 (CD-ROM)
„
User's Guide
„
Getting Started
„
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER"
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER.
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER" for NEC Express5800 Server
which you are going to install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions,
you do not need to create it again.
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER with the
following two procedures.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-5
Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk
for EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server, you can use the
other procedure described later.
Follow the steps below.
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server.
3.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server.
4.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also
turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the DVD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
5.
Select [Create the OEM-Disk for Windows] from [Tools Menu] step.
6.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
7.
Select [Create an Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER] at [Create OEM-Disk] and click [Perform].
8.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
6-6 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Create from [Autorun Menu]
This menu requires Microsoft Windows XP, Vista or Windows Server 2003(or later).
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER from
[Autorun Menu], if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate.
Follow the steps below.
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Start the Operating System.
3.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server.
The Menu will appear.
4.
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
5.
Click [Create drive disk] and select [OEM-Disk for Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition].
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the
Right-click.
6.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-7
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
1.
Turn on the system power.
2.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition CD-ROM into the optical disk drive.
3.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive, press Enter
while the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk drive, this step is unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions setup screen will appear.
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Begin after turning on the system power again.
4.
Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." or "Press F6 if you
need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has
been pressed.
5.
The following message is displayed.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.
‰ If the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) or the RAID
Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A) is used:
Press S.
‰ If the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) or the RAID
Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A) is not used:
Go to Step 8.
6-8 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6.
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the
floppy disk drive, and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
7.
Select the proper RAID Controller and press Enter.
The screen of Step 5 is displayed.
8.
– [LSI MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver (Server 2003 for x64)]
(When N8103-116A/117A/118A RAID Controller is installed.)
– [LSI Embedded MegaRAID (Windows XP/2003 64-bit)]
(When Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) is used.)
<If the SCSI Controller N8103-107 is connected>
Press S.
IMPORTANT: Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEMDisk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive. If the floppy
disk drive has already contained Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER, you do not need to insert the
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER.
The screen of Step 6 is displayed. Press Enter, and go to Step 9.
<If the SCSI Controller N8103-107 is not connected>
Go to Step 10.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
9.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
Select the [Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Windows 64-bit)] and press Enter.
IMPORTANT: If the following message is displayed when you use
the N8103-107 SCSI controller, press S.
The driver you provided seems to be newer
than the Windows default driver.
Windows already has a driver that you can use
for "Adaptec Ultra 320 SCSI Cards
(Windows64-bit)"
Unless the device manufacturer prefers that
you usethe driver on the floppy disk, you
should use the driver in Windows.
The screen of Step 5 is displayed.
Go to Step 10.
10.
<If the SAS Controller N8103-104A is connected>
Press S.
IMPORTANT: Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEMDisk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive. If the floppy
disk drive has already contained Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER, you do not need to insert the
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER.
The screen of Step 6 is displayed. Press Enter, and go to Step 11.
<If the SAS Controller N8103-104A is not connected>
Press Enter, and go to Step 12.
11.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
Select the [LSI Fusion-MPT SAS Driver (Server 2003 x64)] and press Enter.
The screen of Step 5 is displayed.
Press Enter, and go to Step 12.
6-9
6-10 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
12.
When the following message is shown, press Enter to start "Welcome to Setup".
IMPORTANT: If you install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions on
the hard disk larger than 2,097,152MB (2TB), you can specify only a
value equal to or less than 2,097,152MB as partition size.
13.
When the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition has finished, the system
reboots automatically.
14.
The [Windows Setup] screen will be displayed after logged on to the system.
IMPORTANT:
„
In this case, the [Windows Setup] screen may not be displayed.
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition
DISC 2 according to the following procedures.
„
You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition
DISC 2 after the application of "System update".
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition
DISC 2.
In this case, note that the [Windows Setup] screen is not displayed.
15.
Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 CD-ROM into the optical
disk drive.
Confirm the parameters and click [OK].
16.
When the installation has completed, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64
Edition DISC 2 CD-ROM from the optical disk drive, and restart the system.
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver
Installation and Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of this chapter.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-11
Procedure for License Authentication
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label
in which the product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written.
NOTES:
„
Execute the activation within 30 days. System may be locked after
30 days is passed.
„
COA label may be attached to your server.
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack Update the system in the situation below:
„
CPU is expanded (expanded to single processor to multi-processor).
„
Modified system configuration.
„
Recovered the system using recovery process.
The system update brings the correction program provided by Microsoft to be applied to reinforce
the system security. The system update is recommended.
It is necessary to use ServicePack2 or more. ServicePack 2 need not be applied again when
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions CD-ROM where ServicePack 2 is included is used and it is
installed.
If you install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions CD-ROM which contains Service Pack 2, you do
not have to apply "Hotfix for Windows x64" or "Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 (KB921411)".
Go to the section of "Updating the System".
Perform "Updating the System" and application of the "Hotfix (KB921411)".
IMPORTANT: In the situation below, make sure to apply "Updating
the System" and "Hotfix (KB921411)".
„
Modified system configuration
„
Recovered the system using recovery process.
NOTE: If you use Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions CD-ROM
which includes Service Pack 2, the application of "Hotfix
(KB921411)" is not required.
6-12 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Application Process of the Hotfix (KB921411)
Apply the "Hotfix (KB921411)" before execute "Updating the System".
1.
Log on to the system by the account with administrator authority to the server (such as
administrator).
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server.
3.
Click Start menu and [Run], and then execute the following command.
<When Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions is used>
\013\win\winnt\w2k3amd\qfe\enu\kb921411.exe
4.
When the following message is displayed, click [Next].
After that, follow the message to continue the process.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
5.
When the following message is displayed, make sure to click [Finish] to restart the
system.
With that, application process of the Hotfix (KB921411) is finished.
6-13
6-14 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Application Process of "Updating the System"
"Updating the System" applies the drivers necessary for NEC Express5800 Series.
Follow this process after Hotfix for Windows x64 (KB921411) or Hotfix for Windows Server 2003
(KB921411) had been applied.
NOTE: If you install Windows CD-ROM that contains Service Pack 2
to your system, you do not have to apply Service pack 2 again.
1.
Log on to the system with the account that has administrative privilege
(e.g.administrator).
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of server.
The Autorun Menu will be displayed
3.
Left-click on [Setup Windows], and then click [Update the system].
NOTE: Right-clicking on the Autorun Menu produces the same
outcome.
4.
Follow the message of the screen to proceed the application.
[OK] dialog box will be displayed.
NOTE: The following box appears during the update if you have
deployed a full installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition.
Wait until the update completes.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
5.
6-15
When the following message appears, "Updating the System" was finished.
When you apply Service Pack: Click [Yes], and then go to Step 6.
When you do not apply Service Pack: Click [No], and then go to Step 8.
6.
When the following message appears, click [Yes].
7.
When the following message appears, select a Service Pack and click [Open] and then,
according to a message, please apply it.
6-16 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
8.
When the following message appears, click [Yes] to restart the system.
The system has been updated.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-17
Recovery Process
If "Updating the System" is executed before the application of the "Hotfix for Windows x64
(KB921411)", "!" may be displayed on the USB root hub.
If "!" is displayed on the USB root hub, perform application of the "Hotfix for Windows x64
(KB921411)" and the "Updating the System" according to the following process.
1.
Start the Windows Explorer, and click [Tools] and [Folder Options].
2.
Select [Files and Folders] - [Hidden files and folders] - [Show hidden files and folders]
radio button from Advanced settings in the [View] tab.
3.
Check off the following check box in the [Files and Folders] from Advanced settings in
the [View] tab, and then click [OK].
‰ Hide extensions for know file type
‰ Hide protected operating system files [Recommended]
When the message "You have chosen to display protected operating system files..." is
displayed, click [Yes].
4.
Make sure of the files.
Open "<System drive:>\WINDOWS\system32\drivers" directory, and make sure
usbhub.sys and usbport.sys are exists in the directory.
If you can not found them, copy the files according to the following process.
(1) Open "<System drive:>\WINDOWS\system32\dllcache" directory.
(2) Copy usbhub.sys and usbport.sys from the directory noted above to
"<Systemdrive:>\WINDOWS\system32\drivers".
5.
Restart the system.
6.
Refer to [Application process of the Hotfix (KB921411)] and apply the "Hotfix for
Windows x64 (KB921411)".
7.
Refer to [Application process of "Updating the System"] and execute "Updating the
System".
8.
Restart the system.
With that, process is finished.
6-18 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please
refer to the document attached to the driver.
PROSet
NOTE: All of the operation that related to Intel® PROSet is must be
executed by administrator privileges. Operation by [Remote Desktop
Connection] is prohibited.
Without changing any parameter when opened the properties of
adapter teaming, please click the [Cancel] button for close the dialog.
Click [OK] button will cause temporary loss of network connectivity.
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
„
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
„
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any
trouble and enhances throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-19
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive.
If the autorun menu is displayed, close menu screen.
2.
The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "dxsetup.exe" in the following directory.
\013\win\winnt\w2k3amd\r1441\apps\prosetdx\winx64
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6.
Click [Next].
7.
Click [Install].
8.
When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finished].
9.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive, restart the
system.
6-20 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Network Driver
Specify the details of network driver.
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and
Duplex mode need to be specified manually.
IP addresses is not be able to set when the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" check box OFF.
This phenomenon will occur with the certain condition.
Check ON the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" check box and IP address will be able to set.
When PROSet is not installed
1.
Open the [Device Manager].
2.
Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4.
Click [OK].
5.
Restart the system.
When PROSet is installed
1.
Open the [Device Manager].
2.
Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click the [Link Speed] and specify the [Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4.
Click [OK].
5.
Restart the system.
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: It is recommend to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding
Services]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet)
that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or receives. This
tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For information on
how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems"
described later in this chapter.
Re-install the Network Driver
The network driver will be installed automatically.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-21
Optional Network Board Driver
If you want to use optional Network Board (N8104-122/125/126), the network driver will be
installed automatically. Therefore, the driver attached to the Network board should not be used.
If you want to use optional Network Board(N8104-122/125/126), install the driver stored in NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER DVD.
„
In case of using (N8104-122/125/126)
"\013\win\winnt\w2k3amd\r1441\pro1000\winx64\ndis5x"
If the procedure of installation is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in the
section "Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver".
„
In case of utilizing (N8104-123A)
Please refer to the installation manual provided with the board.
Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Click [Network adapters] and double-click [(Network Adapter Name)].
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] appears.
NOTE: [(Intel (R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board adapter. All
other names show the Optional Network Board.
3.
Click [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...]. [Hardware Update Wizard] appears.
4.
Select the [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)] radio button and click
[Next].
5.
Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and uncheck the
[Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.
6.
Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and when using [(N8104122/125/126)], specify
[\013\win\winnt\w2k3amd\r1441\pro1000\winx64\ndis5x].
Then click [Next].
7.
Click [Finish].
8.
Restart the system.
6-22 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter
and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group
when any trouble occurred on that adapter.
Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter
and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters.
This feature includes AFT feature.
IMPORTANT:
„
AFT/ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers and
restarting the system.
„
All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must
exist on the same LAN. If they are connected to the separate
switches, they will not work normally.
„
The adapters specified as a group of Adaptive Load Balancing
(ALB) can be connected to only Switching Hub.
„
When exchange the mother board or option network card, make
sure to remove the adapter team before exchanges and recreate the
adapter team after exchange complete.
„
Please confirm the port setting of switching hub (L2) matches the
server network adapter Teaming mode.
Setup Teaming
1.
Open the [Device Manager].
2.
Open [Network adapters] → [Intel(R) xxx] properties.
3.
Click [Teaming] tab and check the [Team this adapter with other adapters] check box.
Click [New Team].
4.
Fill the name of the team in [Specify a name for the team] and click [Next].
5.
Include the adapter to the team and click [Next].
6.
Select a team type ([Adapter Fault Tolerance]/[Adaptive Load Balancing]).
Click [Next].
7.
Click [Finish].
8.
Click [TEAM: "Team name"] from [Device manager] → [Network adapters] to modify
the team. Click [Settings] tab and click [Modify Team] button.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
9.
6-23
Refer to the following procedure to set the team member adapter priority status.
– Set Primary
Point the adapter and click [Set Primary] button.
– Set Secondary
Point the adapter and click [Set Secondary] button.
NOTE: Adapter priority config can be confirmed by the following
procedure:
1. Click [TEAM: "Team name"] from [Device manager] → [Network
adapters].
2. Click [Settings] and confirm Adapters in team list.
10.
Click [Test Switch] → [Run test] to confirm the adapter team is properly setup.
Confirm the result in [Test results].
11.
Restart the system.
Remove Team
1.
Open the [Device Manager].
2.
Click [Network adapters], and open [TEAM: "Team name"] properties.
3.
Click [Setting] tab.
4.
Click [Remove Team] button.
5.
Click [Yes] to the message.
6.
Confirm [TEAM: "Team name"] adapter is not existing in [Network adapters] tree and
restart the system.
6-24 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Setting WOL
Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL.
When PROSet is not installed
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Point to [Network adapters] and double click [Intel(R) 82567LM-2 Gigabit Network
Connection]/[Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection] to open the adapter
[Properties].
3.
Click [Power Management] tab and change setting in [Wake On LAN] according to the
following list.
Setting item
Change setting
"Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power"
"Allow this device to bring the computer out of standby"
ON
ON
4.
Click [Advanced] tab and point to [Enable PME].
5.
Set the "Enable" in [Value].
6.
Click [OK].
7.
Restart the system.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-25
When PROSet is installed
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Point to [Network adapters] and double click [Intel(R) 82567LM-2 Gigabit Network
Connection]/[Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection] to open the adapter
[Properties].
3.
Click [Power Management] tab and change setting in [Wake On LAN] according to the
following list.
Setting item
Change setting
"Wake On Directed Packet"
"Wake On Magic Packet"
"Wake on Magic Packet from power off state"
"Wake on Link"
ON
ON
ON
OFF
NOTES:
„
[Power Saver Options] setting is not necessary to change.
„
Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are
executed.
IMPORTANT: The parameters of [Wake On LAN] will not exist, if
the network ports are not available for WOL.
4.
Click [OK].
5.
Restart the system.
6-26 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Graphics Accelerator Driver
If you utilize standard graphics accelerator drivers, update your system with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system.
Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically.
Please follow the following procedure when you want to reinstall the driver individually.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive.
If the autorun menu is displayed, close menu screen.
2.
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "Install.bat" in the following directory.
\013\win\winnt\w2k3amd\video\install.bat
4.
Follow the message to continue the installation.
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to
continue.
5.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive, restart the
system.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-107)
If you use the SCSI Controller N8103-107, update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
DVD attached to your system.
The SCSI Controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing SAS Controller Driver (N8103-104A)
If you use the SAS Controller N8103-104A, update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
DVD attached to your system.
The SAS Controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-27
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-115)
The installation procedure depends on your environment.
Follow steps below appropriate to your environment.
z If the RAID Controller N8103-116A/117A/118A is used:
You do not need to install the driver manually. It is automatically installed by Windows Plug-andPlay.
z If the RAID Controller N8103-116A/117A/118A is not used:
Update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system.
The RAID Controller driver will be installed automatically.
6-28 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
About Windows Activation
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions.
Windows activation process is as follows.
1.
Click [Run] on [Start] menu.
Type as follows in the [Open:] box, and click [OK].
oobe/msoobe /a
2.
When the screen as follows is displayed, click [Next].
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
The following screen is displayed.
3.
Process "Windows activation" according to the following message.
6-29
6-30 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
SETTING FOR SOLVING PROBLEMS
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely
and as soon as possible when it should occur.
Memory Dump (Debug Information)
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the
server.
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump
„
The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of
collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specify the
memory dump.
„
If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, the
message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory
may appear, but continue to start the system. If you restart the
system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.
Follow the procedure below to specify.
1.
Select [Control Panel] and click [System].
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.
2.
Select [Advanced] tab.
3.
Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
IMPORTANT:
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug
information is recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that specify "Kernel
Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 1MB".
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.
Windows Server 2003
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug
information is recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that specify "Kernel
Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 12MB"(In
case the memory capacity is more than 2GB, a free area of
"2048+12MB" or more).
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.
6-31
6-32 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
4.
Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the [Write debugging
information] group box.
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive write the file name "MEMORY.DMP".
D:\MEMORY.DMP
5.
Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.
The [Performance Options] window appears.
6.
Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.
7.
Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.
8.
Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to the value larger than
the value of [Recommended] in the [Total paging file size for all drives], and click [Set].
IMPORTANT:
9.
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "About the
System Partition Size" described earlier.
„
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit
the new memory size.
Click [OK].
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification. In
such case, follow the message to restart the system.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-33
How to Create a User-mode Process Dump File
Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is detected, Dr. Watson
diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure below and specify
Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.
1.
Click [Run] on Start menu.
2.
Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.
3.
Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".
NOTE: You can not specify network pass. Specify the pass on local
computer.
4.
Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with
Windows Debugger.
5.
Select [Full] radio button from [Crash Dump Type].
6.
Check the following check box on the [Options] box.
† Dump Symbol Table
† Dump All Thread Contexts
† Append TO Existing Log File
† Create Crash Dump File
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.
7.
Click [OK].
6-34 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Network Monitor
To utilize Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation has completed, so
we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur.
1.
Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2.
Double-click [Add or Remove Programs].
The [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.
4.
Click [Management and Monitoring Tools] and then click [Details].
The [Management and Monitoring Tools] dialog appears.
5.
Click to select the [Network Monitor Tools] check box, and then click [OK].
6.
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears again, so click [Next].
7.
If the setup asks to install the disk, insert the OS CD-ROM into optical disk drive and
click [OK].
8.
Click [Finish] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.
9.
Close the [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box.
10.
Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click [Network
Monitor]. For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-35
Re-installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist
Before Re-installing the Operation System
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.
Re-installing the Operation System
1.
Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.
2.
Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following
message appears:
The following list shows the existing partitions and
unpartitioned space on this computer.
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.
* Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the proper drive
letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.
3.
Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described in this manual.
4.
The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the previous system.
If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according to the "Procedure for
Modifying the Drive Letter".
6-36 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following
procedure.
1.
Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start [Computer
Management].
2.
Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.
3.
Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the [Change Drive
Letter and Path...].
4.
Click [Yes].
5.
Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to assign.
6.
Click [OK].
7.
If the following message appears, click [Yes].
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no
longer run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?
8.
Close the [Computer Management].
Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
6-37
INSTALLING MAINTENANCE UTILITIES
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD. See Chapter 8
for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations.
6-38 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the
server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
1.
Insert the "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" DVD into the optical disk drive and restart the
system.
2.
Select [Tool menu (Normal mode)].
3.
Select [English].
4.
Select [Maintenance Utility].
5.
Select [System Information Management].
6.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
7.
Select [Save].
Chapter 7
Installing Windows Server 2003
This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2003.
BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003
Read the following notes or information before installing the Windows Server 2003.
Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your server supports the following optional
boards;
„
Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup
„
– N8103-116A RAID Controller (128MB, RAID0/1)*
– N8103-117A RAID Controller (128MB, RAID0/1/5/6)*
– N8103-118A RAID Controller (256MB, RAID0/1/5/6)*
– Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID)
Other controllers
– N8103-104A SAS Controller*
– N8103-107 SCSI Controller*
– N8103-115 RAID Controller (512MB, RAID0/1/5/6)*
* Option
7-2 Installing Windows Server 2003
Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the
OS installation media and Service Pack.
„
Windows Server 2003 R2
– OS installation media (with Service Pack 2)
– OS installation media (No Service Pack) + Service Pack 2
– OS installation media (No Service Pack)
Application of Service Pack
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not attached to your system,
prepare it by yourself.
When installing Windows Server 2003 R2, it is not necessary to apply Service Pack 1.
Updating System
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update Express5800 system" in the Autorun Menu.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic
Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to
Dynamic Disk, note the following issue:
„
Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS
newly.
„
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of OS partition.
Mounting MO Device
Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-3
About Removable Media
Do not set removable media, such as DAT, into the device mounted on your server during the OS
installation.
Floppy Disk Drive
The internal floppy disk drive is not included in your system at the standard configuration. Prepare
the optional USB floppy disk drive if necessary.
About the Upgrade to Windows Server 2003 R2
The "in-place upgrade" from Windows Server 2003 to Windows Server 2003 R2 is not
recommended because it may overwrite any files or registries, and cause unexpected impact to the
system or the applications.
If you install Windows Server 2003 R2, backup user data referring "Windows Server 2003 Clean
Installation", and reinstall Windows Server 2003 R2.
NOTE: "in-place upgrade" is to perform overwrite upgrade from
Windows Server 2003 which already installed to Windows Server
2003 R2.
7-4 Installing Windows Server 2003
About the System Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following
formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size
+ Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 3500MB (Windows Server 2003 R2)
= 3500MB (Windows Server 2003 R2 with Service
Pack 2)
= 5300MB (Windows Server 2003 R2 + Service Pack
2)
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5
Dump file Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 12MB
Application Size
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is
4095MB. If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB, specify
4095MB for the paging file size.
„
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB
memory mounted is '2048MB + 12MB'.
„
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary
space to the partition to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512MB, the partition size will be calculated by the
above formula as follows:
3500MB + (512MB * 1.5) + (512MB + 12MB) + Application Size
= 4792MB + Application Size
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-5
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve
problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk.
1.
Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
2.
See "Setting for Solving Problems" (on page 7-30) and set that debugging information
(equivalent to the dump file size) is to be written to a separate disk.
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written,
then after installing the system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size",
install an additional new disk.)
7-6 Installing Windows Server 2003
INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003
Preparations for Installation
„
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD
„
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition (CD-ROM), Microsoft Windows
Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition (CD-ROM)
„
Windows Server 2003 Service Pack (CD-ROM)
„
User's Guide
„
Getting Started
„
Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER"
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER.
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER" for NEC Express5800 Server which you are
going to install Windows Server 2003, you do not need to create it
again.
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two
procedures.
Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server, you can use the
other procedure described later.
Follow the steps below.
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server.
3.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server.
4.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also
turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the DVD-ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-7
5.
Select [Create the OEM-DISK for Windows] from [Tools Menu] step.
6.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
7.
Select [Create an Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER] at [Create
OEM-Disk] and click [Perform].
8.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
Create from [Autorun Menu]
This menu requires Microsoft Windows XP, Vista or Windows Server 2003 (or later).
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER from [Autorun Menu], if
you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate.
Follow the steps below.
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Start the Operating System.
3.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server.
The Menu will appear.
4.
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
5.
Click [Create drive disk] and select [OEM-Disk for Windows Server 2003].
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the
Right-click.
6.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it safely.
7-8 Installing Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003.
1.
Turn on the system power.
2.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the optical disk drive.
3.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive, press Enter
while the message "Press any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk drive, this step is unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will appear.
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Begin after turning on the system power again.
4.
Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." or "Press F6 if you
need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has
been pressed.
5.
The following message is displayed.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices.
‰ If the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) or the RAID
Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A) is used:
Press S.
‰ If the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) or the RAID
Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A) is not used:
Go to Step 8.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-9
6.
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk
drive, and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
7.
Select the proper RAID Controller and press Enter.
The screen of Step 5 is displayed.
8.
– [LSI MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver (Server 2003 32-bit)]
(When N8103-116A/117A/118A RAID Controller is installed.)
– [LSI Embedded MegaRAID (Windows XP/2003)]
(When Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID) is used.)
<If the SCSI Controller N8103-107 is connected>
Press S.
IMPORTANT: Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive. If the floppy disk
drive has already contained Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER, you do not need to insert the Windows Server
2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER.
The screen of Step 6 is displayed. Press Enter, and go to Step 9.
<If the SCSI Controller N8103-107 is not connected>
Go to Step 10.
7-10 Installing Windows Server 2003
9.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
Select the [Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Windows 32-bit)] and press Enter.
IMPORTANT: If the following message is displayed when you use
the N8103-107 SCSI controller, press S.
The driver you provided seems to be newer
than the Windows default driver.
Windows already has a driver that you can use
for "Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards (Windows
32-bit)"
Unless the device manufacturer prefers that
you use the driver on the floppy disk, you
should use the driver in Windows.
The screen of Step 5 is displayed.
Go to Step 10.
10.
<If the SAS Controller N8103-104A is connected>
Press S.
IMPORTANT: Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive. If the floppy disk
drive has already contained Windows Server 2003 OEM-Disk for
EXPRESSBUILDER, you do not need to insert the Windows Server
2003 OEM-Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER.
The screen of Step 6 is displayed. Press Enter, and go to Step 11.
<If the SAS Controller N8103-104A is not connected>
Press Enter, and go to Step 12.
11.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
Select the [LSI Fusion-MPT SAS Driver (Server 2003 32-bit)] and press Enter.
The screen of Step 5 is displayed.
Press Enter, and go to Step 12.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-11
12.
When the following message is shown, press Enter to start "Welcome to Setup".
IMPORTANT: If you install Windows Server 2003 on the hard disk
larger than 2,097,152MB(2TB), you can specify only a value equal to
or less than 2,097,152MB as partition size.
13.
14.
When the installation of Windows Server 2003 has finished, the system reboots
automatically.
– Windows Server 2003 has been installed: Go to the step 17.
– Windows Server 2003 R2 has been installed: Go to the step 14.
When Windows Server 2003 R2 has been installed, the [Windows Setup] screen will be
displayed after logged on to the system.
IMPORTANT:
15.
„
In this case, the [Windows Setup] screen may not be displayed.
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2
according to the following procedures.
„
You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 after
the application of "System update".
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2.
In this case, note that the [Windows Setup] screen is not displayed.
Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD-ROM into the optical disk drive.
Confirm the parameters and click [OK].
16.
When the installation has completed, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2
CD-ROM from the optical disk drive, and restart the system.
17.
When the installation has completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver
Installation and Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of manual.
7-12 Installing Windows Server 2003
Procedure for License Authentication
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label
in which the product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written.
NOTES:
„
Execute the activation within 30 days. System may be locked after
30 days is passed.
„
COA label may be attached to your server.
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack Update the system in the situation below:
„
CPU is expanded (expanded to single processor to multi-processor).
„
Modified system configuration.
„
Recovered the system using recovery process.
The system update brings the correction program provided by Microsoft to be applied to reinforce
the system security. The system update is recommended.
Service Pack 2 need not be applied again when Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM which Service
Pack 2 is included is used and it is installed.
Go to the section of "Updating the System".
Perform "Updating the System" and application of the "Hotfix (KB921411)".
IMPORTANT: In the situation below, make sure to apply "Updating
the System" and "Hotfix (KB921411)".
„
Modified system configuration
„
Recovered the system using recovery process.
NOTE: If you use Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM which includes
Service Pack 2, the application of "Hotfix (KB921411)" is not
required.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-13
Application Process of the Hotfix (KB921411)
Apply the "Hotfix (KB921411)" before execute "Updating the System".
1.
Log on to the system by the account with administrator authority to the server (such as
administrator).
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server.
3.
Click Start menu and [Run], and then execute the following command.
<When the English version of Windows Server 2003 R2 is used>
\013\win\winnt\dotnet\qfe\enu\kb921411.exe
<When the Simplified Chinese version of Windows Server 2003 R2 is used>
\013\win\winnt\dotnet\qfe\chs\kb921411.exe
<When the Traditional Chinese version of Windows Server 2003 R2 is used>
\013\win\winnt\dotnet\qfe\cht\kb921411.exe
4.
When the following message is displayed, click [Next].
After that, follow the message to continue the process.
7-14 Installing Windows Server 2003
5.
When the following message is displayed, make sure to click [Finish] to restart the
system.
With that, application process of the Hotfix (KB921411) is finished.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-15
Application Process of "Updating the System"
"Updating the System" applies the drivers necessary for NEC Express5800 Series.
Follow this process after Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 (KB921411) had been applied.
NOTE: If you install Windows CD-ROM that contains Service Pack 2
to your system, you do not have to apply Service pack 2 again.
1.
Log on to the system with the account that has administrative privilege (e.g.
administrator).
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of server.
The Autorun Menu will be displayed
3.
Left-click on [Setup Windows], and then click [Update the system].
NOTE: Right-clicking on the Autorun Menu produces the same
outcome.
4.
Follow the message of the screen to proceed the application.
[OK] dialog box will be displayed.
NOTE: The following box appears during the update if you have
deployed a full installation of Windows Server 2003.
Wait until the update completes.
7-16 Installing Windows Server 2003
5.
When the following message appears, "Updating the System" was finished.
When you apply Service Pack: Click [Yes], and then go to Step 6.
When you do not apply Service Pack: Click [No], and then go to Step 8.
6.
When the following message appears, click [Yes].
7.
When the following message appears, select a Service Pack and click [Open] and then,
according to a message, please apply it.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-17
8.
When the following message appears, click [Yes] to restart the system.
The system has been updated.
7-18 Installing Windows Server 2003
Recovery Process
If "Updating the System" is executed before the application of the "Hotfix for Windows Server 2003
(KB921411)", "!" may be displayed on the USB root hub.
If "!" is displayed on the USB root hub, perform application of the "Hotfix for Windows Server
2003 (KB921411)" and the "Updating the System" according to the following process.
1.
Start the Windows Explorer, and click [Tools] and [Folder Options].
2.
Select [Files and Folders] - [Hidden files and folders] - [Show hidden files and folders]
radio button from Advanced settings in the [View] tab.
3.
Check off the following check box in the [Files and Folders] from Advanced settings in
the [View] tab, and then click [OK].
‰ Hide extensions for know file type
‰ Hide protected operating system files [Recommended]
When the message "You have chosen to display protected operating system files..." is
displayed, click [Yes].
4.
Make sure of the files.
Open "<System drive:>\WINDOWS\system32\drivers" directory, and make sure
usbhub.sys and usbport.sys are exists in the directory.
If you can not found them, copy the files according to the following process.
(1) Open "<System drive:>\WINDOWS\system32\dllcache" directory.
(2) Copy usbhub.sys and usbport.sys from the directory noted above to
"<Systemdrive:>\WINDOWS\system32\drivers".
5.
Restart the system.
6.
Refer to [Application process of the Hotfix (KB921411)] and apply the "Hotfix for
Windows Server 2003 (KB921411)".
7.
Refer to [Application process of "Updating the System"] and execute "Updating the
System".
8.
Restart the system.
With that, process is finished.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-19
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section, please
refer to the document attached to the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
„
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
„
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any
trouble and enhance throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to utilize these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive.
If the autorun menu is displayed, close menu screen.
2.
The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* The procedure in the case of the standard start menu
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].
* The procedure in the case of the classic start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "dxsetup.exe" in the following directory.
\013\win\winnt\dotnet\r1441\apps\prosetdx\win32
The [IntelR PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
6.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
7.
Click [Install].
8.
When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finished].
9.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive, restart the
system.
Click [Next].
7-20 Installing Windows Server 2003
Network Driver
Specify the details of network driver.
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and
Duplex mode need to be specified manually.
When PROSet is not installed
1.
Open the [Device Manager]
2.
Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click the [Advanced] and specify the [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4.
Click [OK].
5.
Restart the system.
When PROSet is installed
1.
Open the [Device Manager]
2.
Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click the [Link Speed] and specify the [Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value
specified for HUB.
4.
Click [OK].
5.
Restart the system.
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be
appeared from [Network and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding
Services]. [Network Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet)
that the computer installing [Network Monitor] sends or receives. This
tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For information on
how to install the tool, see the "Setup for Trouble Process" later in this
document.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-21
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT)/Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB)
Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter
and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group
when any trouble occurred on that adapter.
Adaptive Load Balancing (ALB) is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter
and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters.
This feature includes AFT feature.
IMPORTANT:
„
AFT/ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers and
restarting the system.
„
All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must
exist on the same LAN. If they are connected to the separate
switches, they will not work normally.
„
The adapters specified as a group of Adaptive Load Balancing
(ALB) can be connected to only Switching Hub.
„
When exchange the mother board or option network card, make
sure to remove the adapter team before exchanges and recreate the
adapter team after exchange complete.
„
Please confirm the port setting of switching hub (L2) matches the
server network adapter Teaming mode.
Setup Teaming
1.
Open the [Device Manager].
2.
Open [Network adapters] → [Intel(R) xxx] properties.
3.
Click [Teaming] tab and check the [Team this adapter with other adapters] check box.
Click [New Team].
4.
Fill the name of the team in [Specify a name for the team] and click [Next].
5.
Include the adapter to the team and click [Next].
6.
Select a team type ([Adapter Fault Tolerance]/[Adaptive Load Balancing]).
Click [Next].
7.
Click [Finish].
8.
Click [TEAM: "Team name"] from [Device manager] → [Network adapters] to modify
the team. Click [Settings] tab and click [Modify Team] button.
7-22 Installing Windows Server 2003
9.
Refer to the following procedure to set the team member adapter priority status.
– Set Primary
Point the adapter and click [Set Primary] button.
– Set Secondary
Point the adapter and click [Set Secondary] button.
NOTE: Adapter priority config can be confirmed by the following
procedure:
1. Click [TEAM: "Team name"] from [Device manager] → [Network
adapters].
2. Click [Settings] and confirm Adapters in team list.
10.
Click [Test Switch] → [Run test] to confirm the adapter team is properly setup.
Confirm the result in [Test results].
11.
Restart the system.
Remove Team
1.
Open the [Device Manager].
2.
Click [Network adapters], and open [TEAM: "Team name"] properties.
3.
Click [Setting] tab.
4.
Click [Remove Team] button.
5.
Click [Yes] to the message.
6.
Confirm [TEAM: "Team name"] adapter is not existing in [Network adapters] tree and
restart the system.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-23
Setting WOL
Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL.
When PROSet is not installed
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Point to [Network adapters] and double click [Intel(R) 82567LM-2 Gigabit Network
Connection]/[Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection] to open the adapter
[Properties].
3.
Click [Power Management] tab and change setting in [Wake On LAN] according to the
following list.
Setting item
Change setting
"Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power"
"Allow this device to bring the computer out of standby"
ON
ON
4.
Click [Advanced] tab and point to [Enable PME].
5.
Set the "Enable" in [Value].
6.
Click [OK].
7.
Restart the system.
7-24 Installing Windows Server 2003
When PROSet is installed
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Point to [Network adapters] and double click [Intel(R) 82567LM-2 Gigabit Network
Connection]/[Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection] to open the adapter
[Properties].
3.
Click [Power Management] tab and change setting in [Wake On LAN] according to the
following list.
Setting item
Change setting
"Wake On Directed Packet"
"Wake On Magic Packet"
"Wake on Magic Packet from power off state"
"Wake on Link"
ON
ON
ON
OFF
NOTES:
„
[Power Saver Options] setting is not necessary to change.
„
Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are
executed.
IMPORTANT: The parameters of [Wake On LAN] will not exist, if
the network ports are not available for WOL.
4.
Click [OK].
5.
Restart the system.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-25
Graphics Accelerator Driver
If you utilize standard graphics accelerator drivers, update your system with NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system.
Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically.
Please follow the following procedure when you want to reinstall the driver individually.
1.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive.
If the autorun menu is displayed, close menu screen.
2.
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "Install.bat" in the following directory.
\013\win\winnt\dotnet\video\install.bat
4.
Follow the message to continue the installation.
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to
continue.
5.
Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive, restart the
system.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (N8103-107)
If you use the SCSI Controller N8103-107, update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
DVD attached to your system.
The SCSI Controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing SAS Controller Driver (N8103-104A)
If you use the SAS Controller N8103-104A, update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
DVD attached to your system.
The SAS Controller driver will be installed automatically.
7-26 Installing Windows Server 2003
Installing RAID Controller Driver (N8103-115)
The installation procedure depends on your environment.
Follow steps below appropriate to your environment.
z If the RAID Controller N8103-116A/117A/118A is used:
You do not need to install the driver manually. It is automatically installed by Windows Plug-andPlay.
z If the RAID Controller N8103-116A/117A/118A is not used:
Update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system.
The RAID Controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-27
About Windows Activation
Windows Server 2003 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003.
Windows activation process is as follows.
NOTE: When you use Windows Server 2003 R2, activation process is
not needed.
1.
Click [Run] on [Start] menu.
Type as follows in the [Open:] box, and click [OK].
oobe/msoobe /a
2.
When the screen as follows is displayed, click [Next].
7-28 Installing Windows Server 2003
The following screen is displayed.
3.
Process "Windows activation" according to the following message.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-29
The procedure to set PAE option
If your 32-bit system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB, setting PAE option will enable the
system to be installed with over 4GB of memory.
IMPORTANT: However, the Microsoft operating system products
which support /PAE switch option are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check
the supported products.
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 291988
"A description of the 4GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical
Address Extension switch"
In Windows Server 2003 system, the PAE option can be set by editing boot.ini.
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1.
Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].
2.
In [Control Panel], double-click [System].
[System Properties] dialog box will be shown.
3.
Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and Recovery].
4.
Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].
5.
Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003 "
/fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003 ,
PAE" /fastdetect /PAE
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console " /cmdcons
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating
system" drop-down list box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you
can make your system start automatically from the switch you
specified.
7-30 Installing Windows Server 2003
SETTING FOR SOLVING PROBLEMS
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely
and as soon as possible when it should occur.
Memory Dump (Debug Information)
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the
server.
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump
„
The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of
collecting memory dump. Customers need only to specify the
memory dump.
„
If any trouble occur after specifying the process below, the
message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory
may appear, but continue to start the system. If you restart the
system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.
Follow the procedure below to specify.
1.
Select [Control Panel] and click [System].
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.
2.
Select [Advanced] tab.
3.
Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-31
IMPORTANT:
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug
information is recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that specify "Kernel
Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 1MB".
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.
Windows Server 2003
„
To specify "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug
information is recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB, "Complete
Memory Dump" cannot be specified so that specify "Kernel
Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of
"the memory capacity mounted on Express server + 12MB"(In
case the memory capacity is more than 2GB, a free area of
"2048+12MB" or more).
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added
memory, change the write debugging information to [Kernel
Memory Dump] before adding memory. The size of debugging
information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to
adding memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the
debugging information (memory dump) write destination drive.
7-32 Installing Windows Server 2003
4.
Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the [Write debugging
information] group box.
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive write the file name "MEMORY.DMP".
D:\MEMORY.DMP
5.
Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.
The [Performance Options] window appears.
6.
Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.
7.
Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.
8.
Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to the value larger than
the value of [Recommended] in the [Total paging file size for all drives], and click [Set].
IMPORTANT:
9.
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for
collecting debug information (memory dump). The paging file
with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot
drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to
virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set
an enough size of the paging file with the entire system.
„
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "About the
System Partition Size" described earlier.
„
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit
the new memory size.
Click [OK].
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification. In
such case, follow the message to restart the system.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-33
How to Create a User-mode Process Dump File
Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is detected, Dr. Watson
diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure below and specify
Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic information.
1.
Click [Run] on Start menu.
2.
Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.
3.
Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".
NOTE: You can not specify network pass. Specify the pass on local
computer.
4.
Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with
Windows Debugger.
5.
Check the following check box on the [Options] box.
† Dump Symbol Table
† Dump All Thread Contexts
† Append TO Existing Log File
† Create Crash Dump File
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.
6.
Click [OK].
7-34 Installing Windows Server 2003
Network Monitor
To utilize Network Monitor, you need to restart the system after the installation has completed, so
we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur.
1.
Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2.
Double-click [Add or Remove Programs].
The [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.
4.
Click [Management and Monitoring Tools] and then click [Details].
The [Management and Monitoring Tools] dialog appears.
5.
Click to select the [Network Monitor Tools] check box, and then click [OK].
6.
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears again, so click [Next].
7.
If the setup asks to install the disk, insert the OS CD-ROM into optical disk drive and
click [OK].
8.
Click [Finish] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.
9.
Close the [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box.
10.
Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click [Network
Monitor]. For information on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-35
Re-installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist
Before Re-installing the Operation System
Be sure to make backup copies before re-installing the operation system just in case.
Re-installing the Operation System
1.
Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual.
2.
Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following
message appears:
The following list shows the existing partitions and
unpartitioned space on this computer.
Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list.
* Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume. Confirm the proper drive
letter is assigned and then, continue the setup.
3.
Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described in this manual.
4.
The drive letter of the re-installed system may differ from the one of the previous system.
If you need to modify the drive letter, modify it according to the "Procedure for
Modifying the Drive Letter".
7-36 Installing Windows Server 2003
Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter
Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot modify with the following
procedure.
1.
Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and specify [Manage] to start [Computer
Management].
2.
Specify the [Disk Management] in the left side of the window.
3.
Right-click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the [Change Drive
Letter and Path...].
4.
Click [Yes].
5.
Choose the [Assign a drive letter] and specify the drive letter you want to assign.
6.
Click [OK].
7.
If the following message appears, click [Yes].
Changing the drive letter of a volume may cause programs to no
longer run. Are you sure you want to change this drive letter?
8.
Close the [Computer Management].
Installing Windows Server 2003 7-37
INSTALLING MAINTENANCE UTILITIES
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD. See Chapter 8
for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations.
7-38 Installing Windows Server 2003
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the
server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
1.
Insert the "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" DVD into the optical disk drive and restart the
system.
2.
Select [Tool menu (Normal mode)].
3.
Select [English].
4.
Select [Maintenance Utility].
5.
Select [System Information Management].
6.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
7.
Select [Save].
Chapter 8
Installing and Using Utilities
This section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD that comes with your server
and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
8-2 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD helps you install the Operating system/the Management
software or use the maintenance utilities.
When you insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive and restart the
system, the following menu appears.
Installing and Using Utilities
„
Os installation
If you select this item, the Top menu appears.
IMPORTANT: This tool is Configuration Tool that built on Windows
PE 2.1 technology. Pay attention to the automatic reboot that occurs
after 72 hours from start.
8-3
8-4 Installing and Using Utilities
„
Tool menu (Normal mode)
If you select this item, the Tool menu appears.
You can use the below functions for maintenance.
– Maintenance Utility
The Maintenance Utility is usually used by the service representative. (See Chapter
10.)
– BIOS/FW Updating
You can update the system BIOS by using the floppy disk (prepare a 3.5" floppy disk).
– ROM-DOS Startup FD
The ROM-DOS Startup FD is used for starting the ROM-DOS system.
– Test and diagnostics
This function allows you to diagnose this computer. (See Chapter 9.)
– System Management
You can configure the parameters of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller).
Installing and Using Utilities
„
8-5
Tool menu (Redirection mode)
If you want to operate this computer via the BIOS redirection (the console-less function),
select this item.
NOTE: If you operate this computer via the Remote KVM function,
select the "Tool menu (Normal mode)".
The menu's functions are the same as the "Tool menu (Normal mode)".
8-6 Installing and Using Utilities
Autorun Menu
When the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD is inserted into the optical disk drive, Windows
automatically launches the menu as shown below.
This menu is used to,
„
„
„
Read the User's Guide or the other documents,
Update the server system (Windows drivers), and
Install the management software.
NOTES:
„ This menu requires Microsoft Windows XP, Vista or Windows
Server 2003 (or later).
„ This menu is not available for Microsoft Windows 2008 Server
Core environment.
„ Some documents are provided in PDF format. Use the Adobe
Reader to view or print these documents.
If the menu does not appear, select "My computer" by using the Explorer, and double-click the icon
of the optical disk drive that contains the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD.
Some menu items are grayed-out when the logon user does not have the authority of the
administrator or the menu item is not available for your system.
To use the menu,
„
Click on the menu items, or
„
Click the right mouse button on the menu window.
Installing and Using Utilities
8-7
NEC ESMPRO
The NEC ESMPRO lets a system administrator manage remote servers across a network. NEC
ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations, failures, and performance. With
log data collected by NEC ESMPRO, a system administrator can track long-term and short-term
performance, monitor server usage, and check server failure rates.
The administrator can use the information collected to create more efficient data routing procedures
and optimize server usage.
Functions and Features
NEC ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a network.
These features help the system administrator perform daily system operation, system extension, and
transfer tasks. Some features of NEC ESMPRO Manager include:
„
Hardware and software server configuration
„
– Hardware resources mounted in servers, such as the CPU, memory, disks, RAID
System, and LAN boards.
– Software resources, such as operating system information and drivers running on each
server.
Server failures
„
– On-screen real-time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type,
location, cause, and suggested corrective action.
– Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature,
memory failure, crashes, and software failure information.
Performance
– NEC ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen
and displays information, such as the rate of CPU load, memory usage, disk usage, and
LAN traffic. Usage threshold values can help the system administrator monitor and
prevent server overloads.
For installation procedure and detailed explanations on NEC ESMPRO, refer to the online
document in the NEC EXPREDSBUILDER DVD.
8-8 Installing and Using Utilities
Universal RAID Utility
Universal RAID Utility is an application to manage or monitor the following RAID Controllers.
„
Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embededd MegaRAID)
„
N8103-115 RAID controller (512 MB, RAID0/1/5/6)
„
N8103-116A RAID controller (128 MB, RAID0/1)
„
N8103-117A RAID controller (128 MB, RAID0/1/5/6)
„
N8103-118A RAID controller (256 MB, RAID0/1/5/6)
Before attempting to operate Universal RAID Utility, read the "Universal RAID Utility Ver2.1
User's Guide" included in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD. The manual explains the installation
procedure and notes on operating Universal RAID Utility.
Setup with Express Setup
You can install Universal RAID Utility with Express Setup contained in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
DVD. When you start the Express Setup, a dialog to specify an application appears. Select
[Universal RAID Utility] on the dialog.
Manual Setup
You can start the setup program of Universal RAID Utility from [Autorun Menu].
Click to [Setup Software] → [Universal RAID Utility] in [Autorun Menu].
You need to install the following software.
„
Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 or later
„
The Runtime component of the Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1
You can install these software from [Autorun Menu] too.
Click [Setup Windows] → [Install the .NET Framework Ver 2.0 Redistributable Package (x86)] (If
CPU architecture is x64, [Install the .NET Framework Ver2.0 Redistributable Package (x64)]) in
[Autorun Menu] for the setup of Microsoft.NET Framework 2.0.
Click [Setup Windows] → [Install the Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package
(x86)] (Use the x86 package whatever the CPU architecture may be.) for the setup of the Runtime
component of the Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1.
„
Microsoft .NET Framework
To use the RAID Viewer and Log Viewer, Microsoft .NET Framework Version 2.0 or
higher is required.
Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Vista, Windows 7
include .NET Framework Version 2.0 or higher. Therefore, you do not need to
install .NET Framework in case of using them.
Installing and Using Utilities
„
8-9
Runtime component of Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1 library
To use the RAID Viewer, the runtime component of the Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1
library is required.
Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Vista SP1 or later,
Windows 7 include the runtime component of the Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1 library.
Therefore, you do not need to install the runtime component of the Microsoft Visual C++
2005 SP1 library in case of using them as operating system.
Management of RAID System using NEC ESMPRO Manager
You can manage the RAID System managed Universal RAID Utility on NEC ESMPRO Manager
by NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver. 5.2 or later.
The operating system of the computer installed with the RAID system that can manage with NEC
ESMPRO Manager is only Windows.
See the instruction of NEC ESMPRO Manager about system requirements and how to use.
Easy Configuration
You can not use the function of Easy Configuration to LSI Embedded MegaRAID.
Creating Logical Drive of RAID 6
Please use WebBIOS when you create the Logical Drive of RAID 6 by using three Physical
Devices.
Universal RAID Utility cannot create the Logical Drive of RAID 6 by using three Physical Devices.
8-10 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC PRODUCT INFO COLLECTION UTILITY
The NEC Product Info Collection Utility is software installed in this server.
Various information on the server can be collected at maintenance and/or the trouble occurrence.
This utility can be installed from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD.
NOTE: This utility supports the following operating systems.
– Windows Server 2003
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Installation
Described below are procedures to install the utility in the server individually.
1.
Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive after OS starts.
2.
On the menu appeared by the Autorun feature, click [Setup software] – [Product Info
Collection Utility] in order.
The installation of the utility starts. Follow instructions shown on the dialog box to
proceed. (By default, the utility is installed in "System drive: \ezclct" folder.)
IMPORTANT:
„
Log-in the system with an account with the administrator
authority.
„
2.5-GB or more free space is required in the installation drive.
Installing and Using Utilities
8-11
Using Utility
Run "\stdclct\collect.exe" in the installation folder.
The log folder is created in the stdclct folder, and various information on this server is stored in the
data compressed file (zip format).
Uninstallation
On the Control Panel, select [Add or Remove Programs] – [Product Info Collection Utility (Vx.x.x)].
Follow instructions shown on the dialog box to proceed.
8-12 Installing and Using Utilities
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 9
Maintenance
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or
storing the server.
MAKING BACKUP COPIES
NEC recommends you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disk drives of the
server on a regular basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools,
consult with your service representative.
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select "System
Information Management" and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance Utility to make a backup
copy of the system information.
Also make a backup copy of the RAID System configuration data if your system is in the RAID
System configuration. When your hard disk drives have been auto-rebuilt due to a failure, it is
recommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data. To make a backup copy of the
configuration data, use the configuration utility that is resident in the FLASH memory on the
optional RAID Controller. Refer to the manual supplied with the board.
9-2 Maintenance
CLEANING
Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 14 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Maintenance
Cleaning the Server
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow the
procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces:
IMPORTANT:
„
To avoid altering the material and color of the server, do not use
volatile solvents such as thinner and benzene to clean the server.
„
The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the rear panel of
server, and the inside of the server must be kept dry. Do not moisten
them with water.
1.
Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP LED goes off).
2.
Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.
3.
Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.
4.
Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and
squeeze it firmly.
5.
Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4.
6.
Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly, wipe the server with it once again.
7.
Wipe the server with a dry cloth.
8.
Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth.
9-3
9-4 Maintenance
Cleaning the Interior
One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of
the interior of the server, especially around the mother board.
Dust buildup inside the server can lead to several problems. As dust acts as a thermal insulator, a
buildup can prevent proper system cooling. Excessive heat will shorten the life of server
components. Also, dust may contain conductive or corrosive materials that can cause short circuits
or corrosion of electrical contacts.
How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment in which it is
located. For most office environments, you probably should clean the server every 12 months. For
more severe environments, clean the interior every 6 months.
Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing the left side cover.
You will need a small vacuum cleaner (with plastic tipped nozzle and electrostatic protection),
computer grade canned air, and a small brush for cleaning the interior.
Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server.
WARNING
Unplug all power cords.
Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance. Voltage is present
inside the server and display unit even after the power is turned off. All voltage is
removed only when the power cord is unplugged.
1.
Turn off the server and unplug all power cables.
2.
Remove the logic cover and drive cover. (See Chapter 11.)
3.
Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the mother board.
4.
Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the mother board.
5.
Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from the
interior of the server.
6.
Reinstall the covers. (See Chapter 11.)
7.
Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server.
Maintenance
9-5
Cleaning the Keyboard/Mouse
Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP LED
goes off), and then wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth.
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation. To keep the
mouse ball clean, use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the steps below to clean the
mouse regularly:
1.
Prepare cold or lukewarm water, neutral detergent, alcohol, two dry soft clothes, and
cotton swabs.
2.
Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP LED goes off).
3.
Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove
it.
4.
Take out the ball from the mouse. Cover the bottom of the mouse with your hand, and turn
your hand holding the mouse (the mouse is on your palm with the button upward). The
mouse ball is released onto your palm.
Mouse ball
Mouse ball cover
Bottom View
Roller
5.
Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and
squeeze it firmly.
6.
Rub off stains on the mouse ball. Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth prepared in
Step 5.
7.
Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.
8.
Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with alcohol. Wipe
stains slowly and carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the cotton swab.
9.
Blow out any dust from the mouse. Protect your eyes from the dust.
10.
Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.
11.
Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise until it is locked.
9-6 Maintenance
Cleaning Disc
A dusty disc or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly.
Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and disc regularly:
1.
Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP LED is lit).
2.
Press the tray Open/Close button on the front of the optical disk drive.
The tray opens.
3.
Hold the disc lightly and take it out from the tray.
NOTE: Do not touch the signal side of the disc with your hand.
4.
Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT: Do not wipe the lens of the optical disk drive. Doing
so may damage the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.
5.
Push on the tray front to close the tray.
6.
Wipe the signal side of the disc with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT: Wipe disc from the center to the outside. Use only disc
cleaner if necessary. Cleaning a disc with record spray/cleaner, benzene,
or thinner causes damage to the disc contents. At worst, inserting the
disc into the server may cause failure.
Maintenance
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.
Select [Tool menu] - [Test and diagnostics] in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to diagnose the
system.
Test Items
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.
„
Memory
„
CPU cache memory
„
Hard disk drive used as a system
IMPORTANT: When executing the system diagnostics, make sure to
disconnect the LAN cable. Executing the system diagnostics with the
LAN cable connected, the network may be influenced.
NOTE: On checking the hard disk drive, no data is written into the
disk.
9-7
9-8 Maintenance
Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics
There are two ways to diagnose the server: to use the local console (keyboard) of the server itself,
and to use the management PC via serial port (remote console).
IMPORTANT: Two methods of LAN and the serial port are mentioned
in "Maintenance Tools" of Chapter 10 "Troubleshooting" in the way of
communicating in remote console.
Use the serial port to execute System Diagnostics with remote console.
The LAN connection is not for System Diagnostics.
Procedures to start the diagnostics program are as follows:
1.
Shutdown the OS, and power off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.
2.
Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.
3.
Plug the power cord and power on the server.
4.
Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD to start the system.
5.
Select [Tool menu (Normal mode)] when local console of the server is used for, or select
[Tool menu (Redirection mode)] when remote console is used for.
NOTE: If the system displays the [Language selection] menu, select
[English].
Maintenance
6.
9-9
Select [Test and diagnostics].
Select [End-User Mode] and the system diagnostics starts. The diagnostics will be
completed in approximately three minutes. When the diagnostics is completed, the screen
of the display changes as shown below:
Diagnostics tool title
Test window title
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)
Test End
Start 10:06:58 End 10:09:58 Pass 000:03:00 TestTime 000:03:00
Test End : NormalEnd 03 AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00
<System>
MEM
Memory
CACHE
Cache
<SCSI>
HDD_02:000 DK32DJ-36W
[Enter] Detail Information
Guide line
16 count
49 count
NormalEnd
NormalEnd
89 count
NormalEnd
Test result
[ESC] Return to Enduser Menu
Test summary
window
– Diagnostics tool title
Shows the name and version of the diagnostic tool.
– Test window title
Shows the progress of the diagnostics. "Test End" is displayed when the diagnostics
completes.
– Test result
Shows the start, end, and elapsed time and completion status of the diagnostics.
– Guide line
Shows the details of the keys to operate window.
– Test summary window
Shows the results of each test that executed the diagnostics. Move the cursor and
press the Enter key on the cursor line to display the details of the test.
When an error is detected by the system diagnostics, the relevant test result in the Test
summary window is highlighted in red, and "Abnormal End" is displayed in the result on
the right side.
Move the cursor to the test that detected the error, and press the Enter key. Record the
error message that has been output to the Detail Information screen and contact your
service representative.
9-10 Maintenance
7.
Follow the guide line shown at the bottom of the screen, and press the Esc key.
The [Enduser Menu] below is displayed.
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)
Enduser Menu
Enduser Menu
<Test Result>
<Device List>
<Log Info>
<Option>
<Reboot>
Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key.
<Test Result> Shows the diagnostics completion screen of the above diagnostics.
<Device List> Shows a list of connected devices.
8.
<Log Info>
Shows the log information of the diagnostics. Log information can be
saved.
To save it on a floppy disk, insert a formatted floppy disk to the floppy
disk drive, and select <Save(F)>.
If your server is not equipped with floppy disk drive, connect the USB
floppy disk drive.
<Option>
Optional features can be used from this menu.
<Reboot>
Reboots the system.
Select <Reboot> in the [Enduser Menu] above.
The server restarts and the system is started from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
9.
Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the DVD from the optical disk drive.
10.
Power off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.
11.
Reconnect all the LAN cables that have been disconnected in Step 2 to the server.
12.
Plug in the power cord.
This completes the system diagnostics.
Maintenance
9-11
RELOCATING/STORING THE SERVER
Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server:
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the
server plugged to a power source.
IMPORTANT:
„
If the server needs to be relocated/stored due to a change in the floor
layout to a great extent, contact your service representative.
„
Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard
disk drive, if any.
„
Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disk drives to relocated the
server if the contains any.
1.
Take a media out of the server, if any.
2.
Power off the server (the POWER/SLEEP LED goes off).
3.
Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.
4.
Remove all the cables from the server.
5.
Hold the server by its bottom with at least three persons to carry the server.
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the front door to lift the server. The front
door may be disengaged from the server, causing personal injury.
6.
Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.
9-12 Maintenance
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting
If your server does not operate as expected, read this chapter before assuming a failure.
NOTE: For provision against an unexpected failure, it is
recommended to install NEC ESMPRO to your computer.
10-2 Troubleshooting
SYSTEM VIEWERS
Monitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation.
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the language
PC. Check whether any alert is reported on NEC ESMPRO Manager.
[Example]
Troubleshooting 10-3
LED
The server has eight LEDs on the front panel, and three LEDs on the rear. The following describes
LEDs on the server and their indications.
POWER LED
The POWER LED on the front panel is on (green) while the server power switch is on.
If the OS supports the power-saving mode, running the command blinks the POWER LED in green
and place the server in the power-saving mode.
STATUS LED
The STATUS LED on the front panel stays lit in green when the server is in successful operation.
When the STATUS LED is unlit, blinking in green or lit/blinking in amber, it indicates that the
server has failed.
The following table lists indications of the STATUS LED, descriptions, and actions to take.
IMPORTANT:
„
If NEC ESMPRO is installed, you can confirm the cause of a failure
by referring to the error log.
„
To cycle power to the server, shut down the server from the OS and
reboot it, if available. If the shutdown from the OS is not available,
reset or execute the forced shut down or disconnect and connect the
power cord to reboot the server.
10-4 Troubleshooting
STATUS LED
indication
On (green)
Blinking (green)
Off
Description
Action
The server is operating
normally.
The server is operating with
the memory in degraded
state.
The server is operating with
the CPU error being
detected.
The server is off-powered.
POST is in progress.
–
On (amber)
A CPU error occurred.
A CPU thermal error was
detected.
A watchdog timer has timed
out.
An uncorrectable memory
error was detected.
A PCI system error occurred.
A PCI parity error occurred.
A PCI bus error occurred.
Memory dumping is
requested.
A thermal error was detected.
Blinking (amber)
A voltage error was detected.
A fan alarm was detected.
A thermal warning was
detected.
A voltage warning was
detected
An error was detected on
either of the hard disk drives.
Identify the device in degraded state by using
the BIOS setup utility "SETUP," and replace it as
soon as possible.
Check the failed CPU status by using the BIOS
setup utility "SETUP," and replace it as soon as
possible.
Power on the server.
Wait for a while. The STATUS LED turns green
when POST is completed.
Cycle power to the server. If POST displays an
error message, take a note on the message and
contact your service representative.
Wait until memory dumping completes.
Check internal fans for dust or debris. Also
make sure that the fans are firmly connected.
If this error indication persists, contact your
service representative.
Contact your service representative.
Make sure that the fan units are firmly
connected.
If this error indication persists, contact your
service representative.
Check internal fans for dust or debris. Also
make sure that the fan units are firmly
connected.
If this error indication persists, contact your
service representative.
Contact your service representative.
Replace the hard disk drive.
Troubleshooting 10-5
DISK ACCESS LED
The DISK ACCESS LED on the front panel goes on while the internal hard disk drive or optical
disk drive is accessed.
UID LED (Unit Identification)
Pressing the UID switch turns the UID LED located on the front and rear of the server on and off.
Pressing the UID switch again turns off the UID LED. The UID LED blinks upon reception of
command from software. If more than one server is installed in a single rack, the LED identifies the
server you are going to maintain. Especially, this LED helps you identify the target server when
working from the rear of the rack.
LINK/ACT LED
The LINK/ACT LED indicates the state of each factory-installed network port. If the power is
supplied to the server and the hub and they are correctly connected with each other, the LED is lit
green (LINK state). If information is transmitted through a network port, the LED blinks green
(ACT state).
If the LED is not lit in the LINK state, check the network cable and the cable connection. If the
LED is not lit still after the checking, the network (LAN) controller may be defected. Contact your
service representative.
SPEED LED
The SPEED LED on the rear panel indicates whether each of the factory-installed network ports is
operated through the 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T network interface. If the LED is lit
amber, the network port is operated through 1000BASE-T. If the LED is lit green, the network port
is operated through 100BASE-TX. If the LED is off, the network port is operated through 10BASET.
10-6 Troubleshooting
Hard Disk Drive LED
The hard disk drive bay can contain three hard disk drives. Each hot-plug hard disk drive has a
DISK LED on its front panel.
DISK LED
3.5-inch hard disk drive
DISK LED
2.5-inch hard disk drive
The DISK LED indicates the drive status as follows.
„
Blinking green
Indicates that the hard disk drive is accessed.
„
Lighting amber
Indicates that the installed hard disk drive is defected.
NOTE: While hard disk drives are in the RAID configuration (RAID1,
5, or 6), a single failed hard disk drive does not affect the operation of
the server. However, it is recommended to replace the failed hard disk
drive and auto-rebuild (reconfigure) the hard disk drives as soon as
possible. (You can hot-swap such a failed hard disk drive.)
„
Alternate blinking amber or green
Indicates that the hard disk drive is being rebuilt (this status is not a failure). If the
defected hard disk drive is replaced with a new one in the RAID configuration, the data is
automatically rebuilt (auto rebuild function).
The LED goes off when the rebuild is terminated normally. The LED goes on amber if the
rebuild fails.
IMPORTANT: Powering off the server aborts rebuilding. In such a
case, restart the server, hot-swap the failed hard disk drive, and restart
rebuilding. Observe the following notes to use the auto-rebuild feature.
„ Do not power off the server. (If the server is powered off before
rebuilding hard disk drives, the auto-rebuild feature will not start.)
„ When you removed a hard disk drive, wait at least 90 seconds
before installing the hard disk drive back again.
„ Do not replace another hard disk drive while rebuilding is in
progress.
Troubleshooting 10-7
ERROR MESSAGES
If an error occurs in the server, an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server.
Error Messages after Power-on
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power On SelfTest). When the POST detects any error, it displays an error message and its measure on the display
unit.
Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors. However, even when there is no hardware
failure, use of the keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a
keyboard controller error and stop processing.
Immediately after the server is powered
„ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction
(simultaneous key entry of Ctrl + Alt + Delete)
„ Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an OS instruction
„ During hardware initialization following restart of the POST
When the POST detects a hardware failure due to the above reason, restart the server once again. If
the same error message reappears, you may assume there is no hardware error. To ensure normal
operation of the server, however, make sure to follow the following restrictions.
„
„
„
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on
the screen following the server power-on.
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start-up message of the SCSI
Configuration Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the on-screen message before
contacting your service representative. The alarm indication would be a
great help for maintenance.
10-8 Troubleshooting
POST Error Messages
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen. The following
table lists error codes, error messages, and actions to take.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before
consulting with your service representative. Alarm messages are useful
information for maintenance.
Error
code
0200
0210
Error message
Recommended Action
Failure Fixed Disk.
Stuck Key.
Contact your service representative.
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it
again.
Disconnect the keyboard, connect it again,
then restart the system. If the error cannot
be corrected, contact your service
representative.
Release the lock of the key switch. If the
error cannot be corrected in spite of the
release of the lock, contact your service
representative.
Start the SETUP. If the error cannot be
corrected in spite of the start of SETUP,
contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
0211
Keyboard error
0213
Keyboard locked - Unlock key switch.
0220
Monitor type does not match CMOS - Run
SETUP.
0230
0231
0232
0250
System RAM Failed at offset.
Shadow Ram Failed at offset.
Extended RAM Failed at address line.
System battery is dead - Replace and run
SETUP.
0251
System CMOS checksum bad - Default
configuration used.
0252
Password checksum bad - Passwords
cleared.
System timer error.
Real time clock error.
Check date and time setting.
0260
0270
0271
0280
0281
02D0
Previous boot incomplete - Default
configuration used.
Memory size found by POST differed from
EISA CMOS.
System cache error - Cache disabled.
Contact your service representative to
replace the battery. (After restarting the
computer, start the SETUP to provide the
setting again.)
The default values have just been set. Start
the SETUP to provide the setting again. If
the error cannot be corrected, contact your
service representative.
The password has just been cleared. Start
the SETUP to provide the setting again.
Start the SETUP to set the date and time
again. If the same error occurs
successively in spite of the resetting,
contact your service representative.
Start the SETUP to provide the setting
again.
Initialize EISA CMOS.
The cache cannot be used. Contact your
service representative.
Troubleshooting 10-9
Error
code
02D1
02F4
02F5
02F6
02F7
0611
0612
0613
0614
0615
0616
0B22
0B28
0B29
0B42
0B43
0B45
0B60
0B61
0B62
0B63
0B66
0B67
0B68
0B69
0B6F
0B70
0B71
0B74
0B75
0B80
0B81
0B82
0B83
0B8A
Error message
Recommended Action
System Memory exceeds the CPU's caching
limit.
EISA CMOS not writeable.
DMA Test Failed.
Software NMI Failed.
Fail-safe Timer NMI Failed.
IDE configuration changed
IDE configuration error - device disabled
Com A configuration changed
Com A config. error - device disabled
Com B configuration changed
Com B config. error - device disabled
Processors are installed out of order.
Contact your service representative.
Unsupported CPU detected on CPU socket
1.
Unsupported CPU detected on CPU socket
2.
Resource Conflict
Warning: IRQ not configured
System configuration Data Write Error
CPU1_DIMM1 has been disabled
CPU1_DIMM2 has been disabled
CPU1_DIMM3 has been disabled
CPU1_DIMM4 has been disabled
CPU2_DIMM1 has been disabled
CPU2_DIMM2 has been disabled
CPU2_DIMM3 has been disabled
CPU2_DIMM4 has been disabled
DIMM group with error is enabled.
The error occurred during temperature
sensor reading.
System Temperature out of the range.
The error occurred during voltage sensor
reading.
System voltage out of the range.
BMC Memory Test Failed.
BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed.
BMC Core Hardware failure.
BMC IBF or OBF check failed.
BMC SEL area full.
Check IDE configuration.
Check COM A configuration.
Check COM B configuration.
Contact your service representative to
replace the CPU.
Make sure that the server supports the
CPU. If you are not sure, contact your
service representative to request the
maintenance.
Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative to
replace the fan.
Contact your service representative.
Turn off the power once and then on again
to start the server. If the error cannot be
corrected, contact your service
representative.
Start the SETUP and select [Server] [Event Log configuration] - [Clear All Error
Logs] and press Enter to clear event logs.
10-10 Troubleshooting
Error
code
0B8B
0B8C
0B8D
0B8E
0B8F
Error message
Recommended Action
Turn off the power once and then on again
to start the server. If the error cannot be
corrected, contact your service
representative.
0B90
0B91
0B92
BMC progress check timeout.
BMC command access failed.
Could not redirect the console - BMC Busy Could not redirect the console - BMC Error Could not redirect the console - BMC
Parameter Error BMC Platform Information Area corrupted.
BMC update firmware corrupted.
Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted.
0B93
BMC SDR Repository empty.
0B94
IPMB signal lines do not respond.
0B95
BMC FRU device failure.
0B96
0B97
0B98
0B99
0B9A
BMC SDR Repository failure.
BMC SEL device failure.
BMC RAM test error.
BMC Fatal hardware error.
BMC not responding.
0B9B
0B9C
0B9D
0B9E
0B9F
0BB0
0BB1
0BD1
0BD4
0BD7
0BDA
0BDD
0BE0
Private I2C bus not responding.
BMC internal exception.
BMC A/D timeout error.
SDR repository corrupt.
SEL corrupt.
SMBIOS – SROM data read error.
SMBIOS – SROM data checksum bad.
1st SMBus device Error detected.
2nd SMBus device Error detected.
3rd SMBus device Error detected.
4th SMBus device Error detected.
5th SMBus device Error detected.
6th SMBus device Error detected.
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power
once and then on again to restart the
server. If the error cannot be corrected,
contact your service representative.
Turn off the power once and then on again
to restart the server. If the error cannot be
corrected, contact your service
representative.
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power
once and then on again to restart the
server. If the error cannot be corrected,
contact your service representative.
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power
once and then on again to restart the
server. If the error cannot be corrected,
contact your service representative.
Turn off the power once and then on again
to start the server. If the error cannot be
corrected, contact your service
representative.
Update the RMC firmware. If the error
cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
Turn off the power once and then on again
to start the server. If the error cannot be
corrected, contact your service
representative.
Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
Troubleshooting 10-11
Error
code
8068
8069
8150
8151
8160
8161
None
Error message
Recommended Action
Unsupported Processor Speed detected on
CPU Slot 1.
Unsupported Processor Speed detected on
CPU Slot 2.
NVRAM Cleared by Jumper
Password Cleared by Jumper
Mismatch Processor Type/Speed detected
on Processor 1.
Mismatch Processor Type/Speed detected
on Processor 2.
Expansion ROM not initialized – PCI Mass
Storage Controller in slot xx
Contact your service representative.
H/W Configuration of BMC is corrupted.
!! Update BMC F/W Configuration by
configuration tool !!
!! Refer to BMC configuration manual !!
Memory Scramble mode disabled
Start SETUP and provide setting again.
Start SETUP and set password again.
Contact your service representative.
Disable initialization of the optional device
expansion ROM by using the BIOS SETUP
utility (see Chapter 4).
Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to
configure the remote management card
(see Chapter 8).
Contact your service representative.
10-12 Troubleshooting
Messages displayed by RAID Controller during POST
On-screen message
Memory/battery problems were detected.
The adapter has recovered, but cached data
was lost.
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
Firmware version inconsistency was
detected.
The adapter has recovered, but cached data
was lost.
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
Foreign configuration(s) found on adapter
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
Previous configuration cleared or missing
Importing configuration created on
MM/DD hh:mm
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
An enclosure was found that contains both
SAS and SATA drives, but this controller
does not allow mixed drive types in a single
enclosure. Please correct the problem then
restart your system.
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
SAS drives were detected, but this controller
does not support SAS drives.
Please remove the SAS drives then restart
your system.
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
SATA drives were detected, but this
controller does not support SATA drives.
Please remove the SATA drives then restart
your system.
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
Invalid SAS topology detected. Please
check your cable configurations, repair the
problem, and restart your system.
The battery hardware is missing or
malfunctioning, or the battery is unplugged.
If you continue to boot the system, the
battery-backed cache will not function.
Please contact technical support for
assistance.
Press 'D' to disable this warning (if your
controller does not have a battery).
Action
Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
Press C to run the utility to import or clear
configuration.
Contact your service representative.
RAID Controller may be faulty. Contact your service
representative to replace the RAID controller.
RAID Controller may be faulty. Contact your service
representative to replace the RAID controller.
RAID Controller may be faulty. Contact your service
representative to replace the RAID controller.
Check if cable is connected properly. If the same
error persists, contact your service representative.
<When battery is not used>
Press D to hide this message.
<When battery is used>
Check if battery is connected properly. If the same
error persists, contact your service representative.
Troubleshooting 10-13
On-screen message
Your VDs that are configured for write-back
are temporarily running in write-through
mode.
This is caused by the battery being charged,
missing, or bad.
Please allow battery to charge for 24 hours
before evaluating battery for replacement.
The following VDs are affected :AFXX
Press any key to continue.
Invalid SAS Address present in MFC data.
Please program valid SAS Address, and
restart your system.
Some configured disks have been removed
from your system, or are no longer
accessible. Please check your cables and
also ensure all disks are present.
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
The following VDs have missing disks: xx
If you proceed (or load the configuration
utility), these VDs will be marked OFFLINE
and will be inaccessible.
Please check your cables and ensure all
disks are present.
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
The following VDs are missing: xx
If you proceed (or load the configuration
utility), these VDs will be removed from your
configuration. If you wish to use them at a
later time, they will have to be imported. If
you believe these VDs should be present,
please power off your system and check
your cables to ensure all disks are present.
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
All of the disks from your previous
configuration are gone. If this is an
unexpected message, then please power off
your system and check your cables to
ensure all disks are present.
Press any key to continue, or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
Action
<When battery is not used>
Ignore this message.
<When battery is used>
Run WebBIOS or Universal RAID Utility to check if
battery is detected.
• Battery is not detected:
– Check if battery is connected properly.
– Battery may be insufficiently charged. Halt the
system for 24 hours or longer and charge
battery.
• Battery is detected:
– Halt the system for 9 hours or longer and
charge battery.
If the same error persists, contact your service
representative.
Contact your service representative.
Check if cable and hard disk drives are connected
properly. If the same error persists, contact your
service representative.
10-14 Troubleshooting
On-screen message
The cache contains dirty data, but some
VDs are missing or will go offline, so the
cached data can not be written to disk. If this
is an unexpected error,
then please power off your system and
check your cables to ensure all disks are
present. If you continue, the data in cache
will be permanently discarded.
Press 'X' to acknowledge and permanently
destroy the cached data.
Invalid memory configuration detected.
Please contact your system support.
System has halted.
RAID Adapter
FW Failed Validation!!!
Adapter needs to be reflashed.
Press any key to continue.
Cache data was lost due to an unexpected
power-off or reboot during a write operation,
but the adapter has recovered. This could
be due to memory problems, bad battery, or
you may not have a battery installed.
Press any key to continue or 'C' to load the
configuration utility.
Entering the configuration utility in this state
will result in drive configuration changes.
Press 'Y' to continue loading the
configuration utility or please power off your
system and check your cables to ensure all
disks are present and reboot.
Multibit ECC errors were detected on the
controller.
DIMM on the controller needs replacement.
If you continue, data corruption can occur.
Press 'X' to continue or else power off the
system and replace the DIMM module and
reboot. If you have replaced the DIMM
please press 'X' to continue.
Multiple Single-bit ECC errors were detected
during the previous boot of the controller.
DIMM on the controller needs replacement.
If you continue, data corruption can occur.
Press 'X' to continue or else power off the
system and replace the DIMM module and
reboot. If you have replaced the DIMM
please press 'X' to continue.
Action
Check if cable, hard disk drives, and upgrade kit are
connected properly. If the same error persists,
contact your service representative.
NOTE: If you press X, the data in cache memory will
be lost.
Contact your service representative to replace the
RAID controller.
Contact your service representative to replace the
RAID controller.
<When battery is not used>
Run WebBIOS or Universal RAID Utility to check the
setting for cache mode. If forced write-back is
specified, change it to constant write back or write
through mode.
<When battery is used>
Check if battery is connected properly.
If the same error persists, contact your service
representative to replace the RAID controller and
battery.
Contact your service representative to replace the
RAID controller.
Contact your service representative to replace the
RAID controller.
Contact your service representative to replace the
RAID controller.
Troubleshooting 10-15
On-screen message
Single-bit overflow ECC errors were
detected during the previous boot of the
controller. DIMM on the controller needs
replacement.
If you continue, data corruption can occur.
Press 'X' to continue or else power off the
system and replace the DIMM module and
reboot. If you have replaced the DIMM
please press 'X' to continue.
Action
Contact your service representative to replace the
RAID controller.
10-16 Troubleshooting
Beep Codes
If an error occurs during the POST, the server beeps, indicating the type of error.
Each number indicates the number of short beeps, and a hyphen indicates a pause. For example, the
beep interval 1-3-1-1 indicates 1 beep, pause, 3 beeps, pause, 1 beep, pause, and 1 beep notifying
that the DRAM refresh test error occurred.
Beep code
3-3
(repetitive)
1-2-2-3
1-3-1-1
Description
ROM checksum error
Recommended action
Contact your service representative to replace
the mother board.
DRAM refresh test error
1-3-1-3
Keyboard controller error
1-3-3-1
1-3-4-1
1-3-4-3
1-4-1-1
1-5-1-1
No memory or capacity check
error
DRAM address error
DRAM test Low Byte error
DRAM test High Byte error
CPU startup error
Check if the DIMMs are properly connected. If
the error persists, contact your service
representative to replace DIMM or mother
board.
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.
If the error persists, contact your service
representative to replace the mother board.
Check if the DIMMs are properly connected. If
the error persists, contact your service
representative to replace DIMM or mother
board.
1-5-2-1
No CPU installed
2-1-2-3
2-2-3-1
1-2
BIOS ROM copyright test error
Unexpected interrupt test error
Option ROM initialization error
Contact your service representative to replace
the mother board.
Contact your service representative to replace
the CPU or mother board.
Contact your service representative to replace
the mother board.
Check if BIOS SETUP is correctly configured.
If an expansion of Option ROM for additionally
installed PCI board is not displayed, check if
the PCI board is properly installed. If the error
persists, contact your service representative to
replace the mother board or PCI board.
NOTE: Beep code 1-5-4-2 informs you that AC power supply is
interrupted due to power failure or momentary voltage drop and the
system is restarted. This is not an error.
Troubleshooting 10-17
Error Messages on Virtual LCD
NEC EXPRESSSCOPE Engine 2 (Remote Management Controller) on your server board allows
you to monitor the server status on the WEB browser-based screen of the client PC via network.
The virtual LCD (16 digits x 2 lines) in the "Host Information" area displays the POST codes and
status message.
When POST detects an error, the POST error code is displayed on the virtual LCD upon completion
of POST. See the table for POST error codes for details.
Example:
Virtual LCD
Message send from BIOS
Message send from BMC
Status indicators
POWER ON
ATTENTION
Messages displayed on upper line (BIOS message)
On-screen message
XX BIOS Rev XXXX
Prepare To Boot
Mem Reconfigured
Mem Err Disable
CPU Reconfigured
Memory C-Err XX
Memory U-Err XX
PCI Bus SERR XX
PCI Bus PERR XX
Chipset Err XXXX
Description
POST in progress.
XX: POST code, YYYY: BIOS version
POST completes normally.
POST completes with memory degraded.
A correctable memory error frequently
occurred.
POST completes with processor
degraded.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #XX.
An uncorrectable error has occurred in
DIMM #XX.
A SERR has occurred in the PCI bus XX.
A PERR has occurred in the PCI bus XX.
A chipset error occurred.
Action
Wait until POST completes.
Contact your service
representative.
10-18 Troubleshooting
Messages displayed on lower line (BMC message)
On-screen message
Proc VccpAlm XX
BB +1.2v Alm XX
BB +1.5v Alm XX
BB +1.8v Alm XX
BB +3.3v Alm XX
BB +3.3vs Alm XX
BB +5.0v Alm XX
BB +5vs Alm XX
BB +12v Alm XX
VBAT Alm XX
BB Temp2 Alm XX
Description
Voltage alarm occurred
XX=09: high voltage (fatal)
XX=07: high voltage (warning)
XX=02: low voltage (warning)
XX=00: low voltage (fatal)
DUMP Request !
Mother board thermal error occurred.
XX=09: high voltage (fetal)
XX=07: high voltage (warning)
XX=02: low voltage (warning)
XX=00: low voltage (fetal)
Processor thermal error occurred.
XX=09: high voltage (fetal)
XX=07: high voltage (warning)
XX=02: low voltage (warning)
XX=00: low voltage (fetal)
Dump switch is pressed.
OS shutdown Alm
OS stop error occurred.
Power On Cnt Alm
Proc Missing
Proc T-Trip
Power supply failure occurred.
Processor is not found.
Thermal Trip occurred on processor. The
system is forcibly turned off.
IERR occurred on processor.
SMI timeout occurred.
Watchdog timer timeout error occurred.
A fan alarm occurred.
X: 3 to 12
Proc Temp Alm XX
Proc Therm % XX
Processor IERR
SMI timeout
WDT timeout
SF X Alarm
HDD Fault
Action
Contact your service
representative.
A hard disk drive error occurred.
Fan may be faulty or clogged
with dust.
Contact your service
representative.
Wait for completion of
memory dump collection.
Take note of on-screen
message, wait for completion
of memory dump collection,
then contact your service
representative.
Contact your service
representative.
Fan may be faulty or clogged
with dust.
Contact your service
representative.
1. Check if the hard disk
drives are properly
installed.
2. Replace the failed hard
disk drive and perform
rebuilding.
3. If the same error occurs,
contact your service
representative.
Troubleshooting 10-19
SOLVING PROBLEMS
When the server fails to operate as expected, see the following to find out your problem and follow
the instruction given before asking for repair.
If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem, take a note on the onscreen message and contact your service representative.
Problems with the Server
Fail to power on the server:
‰
Is the server is properly supplied with power?
→ Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the
power specifications for the server.
→ Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server. Check the power cord
for broken shield or bent plugs.
→ Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.
→ If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it
outputs power. See the manual that comes with the UPS for details.
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS
setup utility of the server.
<Menu to check: [Server] - [AC-LINK]>
‰
Did you press the POWER switch?
→ Press the POWER switch on the front of the server to turn on the power (the
POWER LED lights).
Fail to power off the server:
‰
Is the POWER switch enabled?
→ Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility.
<Menu to check: [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit]- [Enabled]>
10-20 Troubleshooting
POST fails to complete:
‰
Is the DIMM board installed?
→ Check if DIMMs are properly installed.
‰
Is the memory size large?
→ The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large. Wait for a
while.
‰
Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the
server?
→ If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up, POST
may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding. In such
a case, restart the server again. Do not perform any keyboard or mouse operation
until the BIOS start-up message appears when you restart the server.
‰
Does the server have contains appropriate memory boards or PCI devices?
→ Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.
Fail to access to internal or external devices (or such devices fail to operate):
‰
Are cables properly connected?
→ Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also
make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order.
‰
Is the power-on order correct?
→ When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external
devices first, then the server.
‰
Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?
→ Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual that
comes with the device to install its driver.
‰
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ When the server has PCI devices connected, make sure to set the PCI device
interrupt and others with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server. (Most PCI devices
generally do not require any change to the configuration, but some boards do
require specific settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the board for details
to make correct settings.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot xx ROM]
x: PCI slot number>
→ Some devices connected to the serial, parallel, or USB port may require I/O port
address or operation mode settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the board
for details to make correct settings.
<Menu to check: [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration]>
Troubleshooting 10-21
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:
‰
Is the cable properly connected?
→ You must use the provided keyboard/mouse branch cable (Y cable) for this server.
Make sure that the provided cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear
of the server.
→ The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is
powered (not applicable to USB devices). Power of the server first and connect it
properly.
‰
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of the
server. Check the settings with the BIOS SETUP utility.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Numlock]>
‰
Are the server drivers installed?
→ Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and
mouse drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the OS.)
Some OS's allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to manual
that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are
correct.
Fail to access to the disc:
‰
Is the disc properly set in the optical disk drive tray?
→ The tray is provided with a holder to secure the disc. Make sure that the disc is
placed properly in the holder.
‰
Is the disc applicable to the server?
→ For the disc which does not conform to the DVD/CD standard, the playback of
such a disc with the optical disk drive is not guaranteed.
→ The disc for Macintosh is not available for use.
Inserted the correct disc but the message like the following is displayed:
The CD-ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD-ROM is inserted.
Please insert the correct CD-ROM.
OK
‰
Is the data side of the disc dirty or injured?
→ Take the disc out of the optical disk drive, confirm that it is not dirty or injured,
reset and click [OK].
10-22 Troubleshooting
Fail to access the hard disk drive:
(Refer to the documentation supplied with the RAID Controller.)
‰
Is the hard disk drive applicable to the server?
→ Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.
‰
Is the hard disk drive properly installed?
→ Make sure to lock the hard disk drive with the lever on its handle. The hard disk
drive is not connected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed
(see Chapter 11).
DISK ACCESS LED lights green:
‰
Is the RAID controller installed?
→ Patrol Read is running. If N8103-115/116A/117A/118A is installed, Patrol Read
runs regularly.
During Patrol Read, the Access LED on hard disk drive lights as follows.
– Blinks green if SAS hard disk drives are installed.
– Lights green if SATA hard disk drives are installed.
‰
Other than above:
→ The LED lights green while accessing the hard disk drive. Lighting orange of this
LED does not mean hard disk drive failure.
Fail to access the (internal or external) SCSI devices:
‰
Is the SCSI device applicable to the server?
→ Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.
‰
Are SCSI devices properly configured?
→ When the server has external SCSI devices connected, hard disk drive settings,
including SCSI ID and terminator, are required. Refer to the manual that comes
with the SCSI device for details.
‰
Are the SCSI controllers (including optional controllers) properly configured?
→ Use the SCSI BIOS setup utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices
connected to the SCSI connector on the mother board. When the server has an
optional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices connected to it, use the SCSI
BIOS setup utility that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper
configuration. See the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller for
details.
Troubleshooting 10-23
Fail to start the OS:
‰
Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD in the optical disk drive?
→ Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD and restart the server.
‰
Is the OS broken?
→ Use recovery process to recover the system.
The server is not found on the network:
‰
Is the LAN cable connected?
→ Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the server.
Also make sure that the LAN cable to use conforms with the network interface
standard.
‰
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of the
server. Check the setting with the BIOS SETUP utility.
<Menus to check:
[Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Onboard LAN] - [LAN Controller]>
‰
Have the protocol and service already configured?
→ Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol,
such as TCP/IP, and services are properly specified.
‰
Is the transfer speed correct?
→ Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the "Link Speed
& Duplex" value the same as the value specified for HUB.
The POWER LED goes on when the power cord is connected:
→ When the server receives an AC power after the power cord is connected, the
POWER LED goes on. This is a normal operation of the server, not a fault. The
LED will go off when DC power is turned on, and then off.
10-24 Troubleshooting
In case using Intel Network adapter teaming:
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Warning
iANSMiniport
None
11
Adapter link down: Intel ----
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Warning
iANSMiniport
None
13
Intel ---- has been deactivated from the team.
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Error
iANSMiniport
None
16
[Team Name]: The last adapter has lost link.
Team network connection has been lost.
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Warning
iANSMiniport
None
22
Primary Adapter does not sense any Probes:
Intel ---- Possible reason: partitioned Team.
→ Above mentioned event log will appear when the system starts.
There is no problem in LAN driver operation.
LAN driver is installed:
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Warning
e1qexpress
None
27
Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection.
Network link has been disconnected.
→ Even if LAN cable is connected, above mentioned event log will appear when the
system starts.
There is no problem in LAN driver operation.
Troubleshooting 10-25
Problems with Windows
Transmission performance on LAN is insufficient when Jumbo Frame feature is
used:
→ When 9KB is specified for Jumbo frame size, transmission performance may not
be sufficient as expected depending on the running condition or network
environment. In such cases, specify 4KB for Jumbo frame size.
The following system events are logged when Windows Server 2008 is installed:
Event ID:
5
Soruce:
storflt
Level:
Warning
Description: the Virtual Storage Filter Driver is disabled through the registry.
It is inactive for all disk drivers.
Event ID:
134
Source:
Microsoft-Windows-Time-Service
Level:
Warning
Description: NtpClient was unable to set a manual peer to use as a time source because
of DNS resolution error on 'time.windows.com,0x9'. NtpClient will try
again in 15 minutes and double the reattempt interval thereafter.
The error was: No such host is known. (0x80072AF9)
Event ID:
263
Source:
PlugPlayManager
Level:
Warning
Description: The service 'ShellHWDetection' may not have unregistered for device
event notifications before it was stopped.
Event ID:
7000
Source:
Service Control Manager
Level:
Error
Description: The Parallel port driver service failed to start due to the following error:
The service cannot be started, either because it is disabled or because it has
no enabled devices associated with it.
Event ID:
15016
Source:
Microsoft-Windows-Http
Level:
Error
Description: Unable to initialize the security package Kerberos for server side
authentication. The data field contains the error number.
→ These events do not affect system operation. Ignore these messages.
10-26 Troubleshooting
The following application events are logged when Windows Server 2008 is installed:
Event ID:
63
Source:
Microsoft-Windows-WMI
Level:
Warning
Description: A provider, Ncs2, has been registered in the Windows Management
Instrumentation namespace Root\cimv2 to use the LocalSystem account.
This account is privileged and the provider may cause a security violation
if it does not correctly impersonate user requests.
A provider, IntelEthernetDiag, has been registered in the Windows
Management Instrumentation namespace Root\CIMv2 to use the
LocalSystem account. This account is privileged and the provider may
cause a security violation if it does not correctly impersonate user requests.
A provider, WmiPerfClass, has been registered in the Windows
Management Instrumentation namespace root\cimv2 to use the
LocalSystem account. This account is privileged and the provider may
cause a security violation if it does not correctly impersonate user requests.
Event ID:
6000
Source:
Microsoft-Windows-Winlogon
Level:
Warning
Description: The winlogon notification subscriber <GPClient> was unavailable to
handle a notification event.
Event ID:
6001
Source:
Microsoft-Windows-Winlogon
Level:
Warning
Description: The winlogon notification subscriber <GPClient> failed a notification
event.
→ These events do not affect system operation. Ignore these messages.
The following system event is logged when Windows Server 2008 is installed:
Event ID:
10
Source:
VDS Dynamic Provider
Description: The provider failed while storing notifications from the driver.
The Virtual Disk Service should be restarted. hr=80042505
→ Go to the Microsoft website:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/948275/en-us/
Troubleshooting 10-27
The following application events are logged when Windows Server 2008 is installed:
Event ID:
1021
Source:
Microsoft-Windows-Security-Licensing-SLC
Level:
Warning
Description: SLUINotify service has failed to start. hr=0x80070424
Event ID:
Source:
Level:
Description:
1534
Microsoft-Windows-User Profiles Service
Warning
Profile notification of event Create for component {56EA1054-1959-467fBE3B-A2A787C4B6EA} failed, error code is -2147023591.
→ These events do not affect system operation. Ignore these messages.
In the case of Windows Server 2008, LAN driver is installed:
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Warning
e1qexpress
None
27
Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection.
Network link has been disconnected.
→ Above mentioned event log will appear when the system starts.
There is no problem in LAN driver operation.
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions:
Source:
DCOM
Category:
Error
Event ID:
10016
Description: The application-specific permission settings do not grant Local Activation
permission for the COM server application with CLSID {555F3418-D99E4E51-800A-6E89CFD8B1D7} to the user {NT AUTHORITY\LOCAL
SERVICE} SID {S-1-5-19}.
This security permission can be modified using the component Services
administrative tool.
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
10-28 Troubleshooting
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions:
Event Source:
Event Type:
Event ID:
Description:
Service Control Manager
Error
7011
Timeout (30000 milliseconds) waiting for a transaction response from the
IMAP4Svc service.
→ When this event is not registered by rebooting the system, it is not a problem in
operating the system.
Installed Service Pack before application of Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 during
Windows Server 2003 R2 installation:
→ Apply Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2, and then install Service Pack again by
"Updating the System".
Fail to access to USB devices on Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition or Windows
Server 2003:
‰
Did you apply [Hotfix for Windows x64 "KB921411"] or [Hotfix for Windows Server
2003 (KB921411)] prior to the "Updating the System" process?
Specify whether "!" is displayed or not on the USB root hub.
<verification process>
Click Start menu, right-click [My Computer], and click [Manage] to start Device
Manager.
And then, select [Device Manager] from the left side window.
→ If "!" is displayed on the USB root hub, apply the Hotfix according to the
"Recovery process".
For "Recovery process", see Chapter 6 or Chapter 7 for details.
Fail to restart the system with the message means "pci.sys missing or corrupt" after
you executed "Updating the System" process to Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition or
Windows Server 2003:
‰
During the application of the ChipSet driver by "Updating the System" process, the
driver for the USB device may be deleted.
Follow the process detailed below.
(1) Start the Recovery console.
(2) Copy "<Systemdrive>\system32\dllcache\pci.sys" to under
"<Systemdrive>\system32\drivers".
(3) Exit the Recovery console, and restart the system.
(4) Refer to "Recovery process" and follow to the process detailed to apply [Hotfix
for Windows x64 "KB921411"] or [Hotfix for Windows Server 2003
(KB921411)] and "Updating the System".
For "Recovery process", see Chapter 6 or Chapter 7 for details.
Troubleshooting 10-29
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you operate
Windows Server 2003 R2:
Source:
Type:
Event ID:
Description:
IPMIDRV
Error
1001
The IPMI device driver attempted to determine if the system supported an IPMI BMC
device. The driver attempted to detect the presence of the IPMI BMC by searching the
SMBIOS for Type 38 record. But either no record was found or the record was not
compatible with the version of the device driver.
If a SMBIOS Type 38 record was detected, the Dump Data field of the event contains
a binary representation of the record.
→ If you use "Hardware Management" which is provided by Windows Server 2003
R2, above-shown event log will be registered.
For more details, refer to "Enabling Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2
Hardware Management" on the following site.
[NEC Express5800 Web Site]
http://www.nec.co.jp/express/download/W2K3_R2
In the case of Windows Server 2003, LAN driver is installed:
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Information
e1qexpress
None
32
Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection.
Network link has been established at 1Gbps full duplex.
Warning
e1qexpress
None
27
Intel(R) 82574L Gigabit Network Connection.
Network link has been disconnected.
→ Above mentioned event log will appear when the system starts.
There is no problem in LAN driver operation.
10-30 Troubleshooting
The system displays the message below and fails to log on:
Windows Product Activation
This copy of Windows must be activated with Microsoft before you can
continue. You cannot log on until you activate Windows.
To shut down the computer, click Cancel.
YES
NO
Cancel
→ In Windows Server 2003, the above message will be displayed if you use the
operating system without executing the license authentication. Select "Yes", and
execute the procedure for license authentication.
Cannot install the operating system correctly:
‰
Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system?
→ See Chapter 5, 6, or 7.
Fail to start the OS with the /3GB switch
→ System often fails to start the OS with the /3GB switch.
In this case, please adjust the capacity of the user mode area using the /userva
switch in reference to the following URL.
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/316739/en
During installation, the following warning is registered in the System Log of the
Event Viewer:
Error detected on the device \Device\CdRom0
during the paging operation.
→ There is no problem on this issue.
Fail to start the OS:
‰
Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?
→ Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.
‰
Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD in the optical disk drive?
→ Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD and restart the server.
‰
Is the OS broken?
→ Use recovery process to recover the system.
Troubleshooting 10-31
The OS presents unstable operation:
‰
Did you update the system?
→ Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable
operation. Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD to update the system. (See
Chapter 8.)
The system does not restart automatically when a stop error occurs, though the
system is adjusted to automatically restarting:
→ When the system does not restart automatically, restart it manually.
The system restarts automatically when a stop error occurs, though the system is
NOT adjusted to automatically restarting:
→ There is no problem about this issue.
Check the System Event Log to confirm that STOP error occurred.
Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen:
→ If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen, execute forced shutdown
(forced shutdown: continue to press POWER/SLEEP switch for 4 seconds). The
power will not be turned off if you press the switch for less than 3 seconds.
The PXE boot (network boot) fails or the server is not found on the network:
‰
Is the cable connected properly?
→ Connect the proper cable to the network port on the rear of the Express server. In
addition, make sure that the used cable conforms to the network interface standard.
‰
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of the
server. Check the setting with the BIOS setup utility.
‰
Have the protocol and service already configured?
→ Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol,
such as TCP/IP, and services are properly specified.
‰
Is the transfer speed correct?
→ Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the link speed
and duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB.
10-32 Troubleshooting
The Telnet Service is not installed:
→ Adjust the computer name to 14 characters or less, and then install the Telnet
Service according to <How to install the Telnet Service>.
<How to install the Telnet Service>
1.
2.
3.
Click [Run] on Start menu.
Type "tlntsvr /service" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Computer Management] and then
click the [Services] to specify whether the Telnet Service is registered.
* When the installation of Telnet Service is finished, there is no problem if the computer
name is set to 15 characters or more.
Power ON/OFF (Wake On LAN) feature does not work:
→ Immediately after the AC power is turned on, the Remote Power ON/OFF feature
(Wake ON LAN) is disabled. Start Windows 2003 once, provide settings as shown
below, then shutdown the system. After restart, the Remote Power On/Off feature
is available unless the AC power is turned off.
Select [Start] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer Management].
Select Device Manager, double-click [Intel(R) PRO/1000EB Network Connection
with I/O Acceleration #n] under Network Adapter, and specify as follows in
[Detail] tab.
PME:
[ON]
Wake On: [Magic Packet]
The system time lags:
→ If you do not use the server that adjust time such as NTP (Network Time Protocol)
Server, the system time may differ from actual time.
In this case, use NTP server or disable "Windows Time Service".
Troubleshooting 10-33
Problems with RAID System and RAID Controller
Check the following if the server configuring a RAID System does not operate properly or a utility
does not operate correctly. If a relevant item is found, follow the processing method.
Fail to install the OS:
‰
Is the RAID Controller configured?
→ Provide proper configuration for the RAID Controller by using the LSI Software
RAID Configuration Utility.
Fail to start the OS:
‰
Is the BIOS of the RAID Controller changed?
→ Set the BIOS correctly by using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility.
‰
Does POST recognize the RAID Controller?
→ After making sure that the RAID Controller is connected correctly, then power on
the server.
If the RAID Controller is not recognized correctly despite correct connection, the
RAID Controller may be failed. Contact your service representative.
Rebuild fails:
‰
Is the capacity of the hard disk drive to be rebuilt sufficient?
→ The hard disk drive to be rebuilt should have the same capacity of the failed had
disk drive.
‰
Is RAID0 configured?
→ RAID0 has no data redundancy, therefore, Rebuild is disabled in the RAID0
configuration. Replace the failed hard disk drive, create the configuration data
again and initialize the hard disk drives. Then recover the data by using backup
data.
Auto rebuild fails:
‰
Was a sufficient time taken for hot swap of hard disk drives?
→ To allow the auto rebuild to operate correctly, it should take 90 seconds or longer
for the interval between the removal of the failed hard disk drive and the
installation of a new hard disk drive.
‰
Is configuration correct?
→ Check the setting of auto rebuild by using the LSI Software RAID Configuration
Utility. <Menus to check: Top menu - [Objects] - [Adapter] - [Auto Rebuild]>
A hard disk drive fails:
→ Contact your service representative.
10-34 Troubleshooting
Physical device is not correctly displayed on Universal RAID Utility:
→ If you use LSI Embedded MegaRAID, a part of information on a physical
device is not correctly displayed on Universal RAID Utility.
It is no problem.
Problems with N8190-127/131 FibreChannel Controller
When N8190-127/131 is used, the names of the Fibre Channel controllers may appear with different
names on Device Manager:
→ It is not a problem in operating the system. A directory that contains the driver
software NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD is also displayed.
[Windows Server 2008 64-bit (x64) Edition]
<Drive Letter>:\013\win\winnt\ws2008x64\elxstor\friendlyname.exe
[Windows Server 2008 32-bit (x86) Edition]
<Drive Letter>:\013\win\winnt\ws2008\elxstor\frendlyname.exe
Troubleshooting 10-35
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD, check the
following:
‰
Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server?
→ If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the
server, an error message will appear or the OS will boot.
‰
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server.
Use the BIOS SETUP utility to change the boot device order to boot the system
from the optical disk drive first.
<Menu to check: [Boot]>
‰
If [Os installation ***default***] is selected at Boot selection screen, following
message is displayed.
→ After this message appears, check the error and take the appropriate corrective
action according to the message listed in the table below.
Message
This EXPRESSBUILDER version was not
designed for this computer.
Insert the correct version and click [OK].
(When you click [OK], the computer
reboots.)
EXPRESSBUILDER could not get the
hardware parameters written in this
motherboard.
This version is not designed for this
computer or the motherboard may be
broken. (When you click [OK], the computer
reboots.)
The hardware parameters written in this
motherboard are incorrect.
This version is not designed for this
computer or the motherboard may be
broken.
Cause
This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
version is not designed for this server.
Execute the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
on the compliant server.
This message is shown when NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER could not find
system-specific information because
of mother board exchange and so on.
10-36 Troubleshooting
Problems with Autorun Menu
Cannot read documents:
‰
Do you have Adobe Reader installed correctly in your system?
→ Some documents are supplied with PDF format. To read the document of PDF
format, Adobe Reader is required in your system.
‰
Is the operating system Windows XP SP2 (or later)?
→ With Windows XP SP2 (or later), the following information may appear in
browser.
"To help protect your security, Internet Explorer has restricted this file from
showing active content that could access your computer.
Click here for options..."
1. Click the Information Bar.
The shortcut menu appears.
2. Click [Allow blocked content].
The security alert dialog box appears.
3. Click [Yes] on dialog box.
The menu fails to appear:
‰
Is your system Windows XP or later, or Windows 2003 or later?
→ The Autorun menu is supported by Windows XP/Windows 2003 or later.
→ If your system runs on Windows 2000, you need to setup IE6.0 before using the
menu.
→ The menu is not available for Windows 2008 server core environment.
‰
Is Shift pressed?
→ Setting the DVD/CD with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.
‰
Is the system in the proper state?
→ The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing
to set the DVD/CD. In such a case, eject the disk from the disk drive once and
insert it again.
Some menu items are grayed-out:
‰
Is your system environment correct?
→ The menu items are grayed-out when the logon user does not have the authority of
the Administrator or the system does not meet the requirements to install the
application. Login with the user having the proper authority on the proper system,
and try again.
Troubleshooting 10-37
COLLECTING DR. WATSON DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
Dr. Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors. The location to save the
information can be specified as you like. For more information, refer to Chapter 6 or 7.
MEMORY DUMP
If an error occurs, the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information.
If you saved the dump to DAT, write down that it is saved as "NTBackup" or "ARCServe" on the
label. You can specify the location to save the diagnostic information as you like.. For more
information, refer to "Specifying Memory Dump (Debug Information (refer to Chapter 5, 6, or 7 for
detail)".
IMPORTANT:
„
Consult with your service representative before dumping the
memory. Dumping the memory while the server is in the successful
operation may affect the system operation.
„
Restarting the system due to an error may display a message
indicating insufficient virtual memory. Ignore this message and
proceed. Restarting the system may result in dumping improper
data.
Preparing for Memory Dumping
Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such a case, it is
required to force the server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, is not available if
"Enable" is selected for "Power Switch Inhibit" on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility,
SETUP, because this setting disables POWER switch operation.
Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the
server.
1.
Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility, SETUP.
2.
Select "Disable" for "Power Switch Inhibit" in the Security menu.
3.
Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.
10-38 Troubleshooting
Saving the Dump File
Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin (a
straightened large paper clip will make a substitute) into the switch hole to press the DUMP switch.
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
DUMP switch
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
DUMP switch
Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory. (Memory dumping may
not be available when the CPU stalls.)
IMPORTANT: Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to
break.
Troubleshooting 10-39
RECOVERY FOR Windows SYSTEM
If any file necessary for running the OS is damaged, use the following procedures to recover the
system.
IMPORTANT:
„
After recovering the system, see "Updating the System" in Chapter
5, 6, or 7 and be sure to update the system.
Also, you need to update all the drivers after the system update. For
more information, see "Installing and Setting Device Drivers" in
Chapter 5, 6, or 7.
„
If the hard disk drive can not be recognized, you can not recover the
system.
For Windows Server 2008
If the system fails to start for some reason, rebuild the system using the recovery console. Note that
this method is recommended for only users and administrators who have a thorough knowledge of
the recovery console.
For more information, refer to Online Help.
For Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
If the system fails to start for some reason, rebuild the system using the recovery console. Note that
this method is recommended for only users and administrators who have a thorough knowledge of
the recovery console.
For more information, refer to Online Help.
For Windows Server 2003
If the system fails to start for some reason, rebuild the system using the recovery console. Note that
this method is recommended for only users and administrators who have a thorough knowledge of
the recovery console.
For more information, refer to Online Help.
10-40 Troubleshooting
Maintenance Tools
The Maintenance Tools is a tool of this product prevention to maintain, and to analyze the trouble.
Starting Maintenance Tools
The Maintenance Tools is started according to the following procedure.
1.
Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order.
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD supplied with your server into the optical disk
drive of your server.
3.
Press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot the server from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
(You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
System boots up displaying Boot selection menu.
IMPORTANT: An initial selection of the menu is "Os installation".
"Os installation" starts by the automatic after the Boot selection menu is
displayed.
4.
When a local console is used, "Tool menu (Normal mode)" is selected.
Moreover, "Tool menu (Redirection mode)" is selected when using it with remote console.
Troubleshooting 10-41
IMPORTANT: An initial selection of the menu is "Japanese".
"Japanese" starts by the automatic operation when the operation is not
done for five seconds after the Language Selection menu is displayed.
5.
"English" is selected.
The tool menu is displayed.
When you use a local console
When you use a remote console
6.
Each tool is selected, and it starts.
10-42 Troubleshooting
Function of Maintenance Tools
The following functions can be executed in the Maintenance Tools.
„
Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is started in Maintenance Utility. The Off-line
Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program. When you are unable to
start the OS-dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the Off-line
Maintenance Utility can be used.
IMPORTANT:
„
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your service
representative. The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD you have
created contain a file that describes operation of the utility, but do
not attempt to use the utility by yourself. Contact your service
representative and follow instructions.
„
See the on-line help for details of the Off-line Maintenance Utility.
For further information, ask your service representative.
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features.
– IPMI Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record (SDR),
and filed replaceable unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them.
Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance
part.
– BIOS Setup Viewer
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the
SETUP utility to a text file.
– System Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export
it to a text file.
– System Information Management
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data.
Without the backup data, the system-specific information and/or configuration may
not be restored.
Only the authorized personnel is allowed to restore the backup data.
– System Management
The parameters of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) are set for remote
control and alert.
Troubleshooting 10-43
„
BIOS/FW Updating
This menu allows you to update the software module such as BIOS and firmware of the
server by using the update disk (3.5-inch floppy disk) that is distributed from NEC
customer service representative.
After rebooting the system, an update program is started automatically from floppy disk,
and the various BIOS and firmware programs are updated.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the server while the update program is
running. If the update processing is discontinued, the system becomes
unable to start.
„
ROM-DOS startup FD
Creates a support disk for starting the ROM-DOS system.
„
Test and diagnostics
Execute various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and
if the connection between the server and additional board is normal.
After the Test and diagnostics is executed, a system check program assigned to each
model starts. See Chapter 9 for details.
„
System Management
The parameters of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) are set for remote control
and alert.
This menu's function is the same as the "System Management" of the "Maintenance
Utility".
10-44 Troubleshooting
Maintenance Tools with Remote Console
This subsection describes the procedures for using Maintenance Tools with remote console.
Maintenance Tools contains the remote console feature that allows the system administrator to set
up the server from the management workstation (management PC) via the network or the server's
COM B (serial) port.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not use this feature on any other computer than the server, or on
any other server obtained without the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
Doing so may cause a failure of the server.
„
Be sure to select [Tool menu (Redirection mode)] in [Boot
selection] menu from the remote console.
Starting
The following two methods are available to start the server.
Running Maintenance Tools from the management PC via LAN
Running Maintenance Tools from the management PC via direct connection (COM B)
For the procedure for starting Maintenance Tools with Remote Console, refer to the online
document of NEC ESMPRO Manager.
„
„
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not change the boot device order in BOOT menu in BIOS
SETUP. NEC EXPRESSBUILDER cannot be used if the optical
disk drive is not the first device to launch the system.
„
Use the standard LAN port for LAN connection.
„
Use the serial port B for direct connection.
„
To use this feature, you need to create a configuration file (3.5-inch
floppy disk) that includes communication method between the
server and the management PC, and various setup parameters. Use
NEC ESMPRO Manager or run "System Management" menu from
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to create a configuration file. Save the
configuration file into the root directory of the floppy disk as the
following file name.
– File name: CSL_LESS.cfg
„
If you exit the BIOS SETUP by unusual way (e.g., forced power-off
or reset), the redirection process may fail. In such a case, setup
again by using the configuration file.
„
On Windows Server 2008, you need to open Device Manager,
disable the COM port, and reboot the system to use the direct
connection through COM port.
Troubleshooting 10-45
NOTE: The following items of BIOS setup information will be set as
shown below.
„
LAN Controller:
[Enabled]
„
Serial Port A:
Base I/O Address:
Interrupt:
[Enabled]
[3F8]
[IRQ 4]
„
Serial Port B:
Base I/O Address:
Interrupt:
[Enabled]
[2F8]
[IRQ 3]
„
BIOS Redirection Port:
[Serial Port B]
„
Baud Rate:
[19.2K]
„
Flow Control:
[CTS/RTS]
„
Console Type:
[PC ANSI]
10-46 Troubleshooting
RESETTING THE SERVER
If the server halts before starting the OS, press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete.
This restarts the server.
IMPORTANT: Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the
data in process. To reset the server when it is not frozen, make sure that
no processing is in progress.
FORCED SHUTDOWN
Use this function when an OS command does not shut down the server, the POWER switch does not
turn off the server, or resetting does not work.
Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for at least four seconds. The power is forcibly
turned off. To turn on the power back again, wait approximately 30 seconds after turning off the
power (forced shutdown).
IMPORTANT: If the remote power-on function is used, cycle the
power once to load the OS, and turn off the power again in the normal
way.
Chapter 11
Upgrading Your Server
This chapter describes internal optional devices available for the server, procedures for install or
removing such optional devices, and notes on using them.
IMPORTANT:
„
Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or
removed by any user. However, NEC does not assume any liability
for damage to optional devices or the server or malfunctions of the
server resulted from installation by the user. NEC recommends you
ask your service representative for installing or removing any
optional devices.
„
Make sure to use only optional devices and cables authorized by
NEC. Repair of the server due to malfunctions, failures, or damage
resulted from installing such devices or cables will be charged.
„
For the Windows Server operating system user:
When you made any change to the hardware configuration, make
sure to update the system (see Chapter 5, 6, or 7 for details.).
11-2 Upgrading Your Server
SAFETY NOTES
Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-4
to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
„
„
„
Do not lift the server only by a single person.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover removed.
Do not install the server on the rack halfway.
Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component.
Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions.
Upgrading Your Server 11-3
STATIC PRECAUTIONS
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, option boards, and other components.
Electronic device can be easily damaged by static electricity. To prevent damage, observe the
following information.
„
Wear a wrist strap (an arm belt or anti-static glove).
Wear a wrist strap on your wrist. If no wrist strap is available, touch an unpainted metal
part of the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your
body.
Touch a metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static
electricity.
„
Select a suitable work space.
– Work with the server on the anti-static or concrete floor.
– When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be
generated, make sure take anti-static measures beforehand.
„
Use a work table.
Place the server on an anti-static mat to work with it.
„
Clothe
– Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server.
– Wear anti-static shoes to work with the server.
– Take off any jewels (a ring, bracelet, or wrist watch) before working with the server.
„
Handling of components
– Keep any component in an anti-static bag until you actually install it to the server.
– Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or components.
– To store or carry any component, place it in an anti-static bag.
11-4 Upgrading Your Server
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
Follow the procedure below to prepare for installing or removing components.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow
these instructions may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See
pages 1-4 to 1-12 for details.
„
„
„
„
Do not drop the server.
Do not leave the server being pulled out from the rack.
Do not install the server on the rack leaving the cover removed.
Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component.
IMPORTANT: If you disconnect the power cord from the server, wait
for about five seconds before proceeding to the next step. The
components on mother board may be working for three to four seconds
after the power cord is removed. Make sure that they surely stopped
their operation.
1.
Remove the server from the rack according to the procedure described in Chapter 3. Then,
place the server on a flat and rigid desk.
IMPORTANT: Do not leave the server being pulled out from the rack.
Be sure to remove it from the rack.
Upgrading Your Server 11-5
2.
Remove the top cover.
Put your finger in the hollow place and slide the cover toward the rear of the server, then
lift the cover.
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
To install the top cover, make sure that the hooks on the top cover are inserted into the frame holes
of the server certainly, and put the top cover on the server. Then move the top cover toward the front
of the server.
FRONT
REAR
Insert the end of top
cover into chassis.
FRONT
REAR
11-6 Upgrading Your Server
DEVICE INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE
Install or remove a component from the server in the following procedure.
Hard Disk Drive
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive Model
The server can contain up to four 3.5-inch hard disk drives.
Slot 0
For first hard disk drive
(option)
Slot 1
For second hard disk
drive (option)
Slot 2
For third hard disk drive
(option)
Slot 3
For fourth hard disk
drive (option)
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive Model
The server can contain up to eight 2.5-inch hard disk drives.
Slot 0
For first hard disk
drive (option)
Slot 1
For second hard
disk drive (option)
Slot 2
For third hard disk
drive (option)
Slot 4
For fifth hard disk
drive (option)
Slot 6
For seventh hard
disk drive (option)
Slot 3
For fourth hard
disk drive (option)
Slot 5
For sixth hard
disk drive (option)
Slot 7
For eighth hard
disk drive (option)
IMPORTANT:
„
„
Do not use any hard disk drives that are not authorized by NEC.
Installing a third-party hard disk drive may cause a failure of the
server as well as the hard disk drive.
All hard disk drives must accept the same interface.
Upgrading Your Server 11-7
Installation
Follow the procedure as described below to install a hard disk drive.
1.
Locate the slot in which you are going to install a hard disk drive.
– 3.5-inch hard disk drive model
The server has four slots. Install hard disk drives starting from the leftmost slot.
– 2.5-inch hard disk drive model
The server has eight slots. Install hard disk drives starting from the leftmost slot.
NOTE: With 2.5-inch hard disk drive model, the maximum number of
operable hard disk drives depends on the controller being connected.
SATA controller on mother board: up to six hard disk drives
Optional disk array controller: up to eight hard disk drives
2.
Remove the dummy tray.
Dummy trays are installed in all the hard disk drive bays.
3.5-inch hard disk drive
2.5-inch hard disk drive
IMPORTANT: Keep the dummy trays for future use.
11-8 Upgrading Your Server
3.
Unlock the hard disk drive carrier to let the handle open.
3.5-inch hard disk drive
4.
2.5-inch hard disk drive
Firmly hold the drive carrier and the handle, and insert the drive carrier into the slot.
3.5-inch hard disk drive
2.5-inch hard disk drive
IMPORTANT:
„
Push the hard disk drive carrier until the hook of the handle hits the
frame.
„
Hold the hard disk drive carrier with both hands securely and
carefully.
NOTE: The POWER switch is located close to the hard disk drive bay
0. Be careful not to press the POWER switch when installing or
removing the hard disk drive. Otherwise, the system shutdown will
occur.
Upgrading Your Server 11-9
5.
Close the handle gently.
The handle is locked when a distinct "click" is heard.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to get your finger caught between the
handle and tray. Push the drive further to check if it is firmly secured.
NOTE: Make sure that the handle is hooked to the frame when having
inserted the hard disk drive.
6.
Power on the server. Run BIOS SETUP utility and set boot priority on the Boot menu.
Installing a hard disk drive clears boot priority that has been stored in SETUP.
11-10 Upgrading Your Server
Removal
Follow the procedure as described below to remove hard disk drives.
IMPORTANT:
„
About data on the hard disk drive
Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data (e.g.,
customers' information or companies' management information) on
the removed hard disk drive to any third parties.
Data seems to be erased when you empty "Recycle Bin" of
Windows or execute the "format" command of the operating system.
However, the actual data remains written on the hard disk drive.
Data not erased completely may be restored by special software and
used for unexpected purposes.
It is strongly recommended that the software or service (both
available at stores) for data erasure should be used in order to avoid
the trouble explained above. For details on data erasure, ask your
sales representative.
„
Observe the following to disconnect the power cable.
– Do not twist the cable.
– Always hold the cable connector to pull the cable out.
– Hold the cable connector and pull it straight out.
NOTE: If removing a failing hard disk drive, confirm the slot in which
the DISK LED of the hard disk drive is amber before starting the
removal.
3.5-inch hard disk drive
DISK LED
2.5-inch hard disk drive
DISK LED
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Push the lever to unlock, and open the handle.
NOTE: The POWER switch is located close to the hard disk drive bay
1. Be careful not to press the POWER switch when installing or
removing the hard disk drive. Otherwise, the system shutdown will
occur.
Upgrading Your Server 11-11
3.
Firmly hold the handle and hard disk drive carrier, and pull out the hard disk drive.
3.5-inch hard disk drive
2.5-inch hard disk drive
4.
If using the server with the hard disk drive removed, install the dummy tray in the empty
slot.
5.
Power on the server. Run BIOS SETUP utility and set boot priority on the Boot menu.
Installing a hard disk drive clears boot priority that has been stored in SETUP.
11-12 Upgrading Your Server
DIMM
Install the additional DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) to the DIMM sockets on the mother
board. The mother board is provided with 8 DIMM board slots.
IMPORTANT:
„
The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to
touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity
from your body before handling the DIMM. Do not touch the
DIMM terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the
DIMM directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Antistatic Measures" described earlier.
„
Make sure to use the DIMM authorized by NEC. Installing a thirdparty DIMM may cause a failure of the DIMM as well as the server.
Repair of the server due to failures or damage resulted from
installing such a board will be charged.
Purchase DIMMs of the following models:
– N8102-339 Additional 1-GB memory board
– N8102-340 Additional 2-GB memory board
– N8102-341 Additional 4-GB memory board
NOTE: Up to 32GB of memory (4GB DIMM × 8) can be installed.
(The factory-installed DIMMs need to be replaced in this case.)
CPU1_DIIMM #2
CPU1_DIIMM #4
CPU1_DIIMM #1
CPU1_DIIMM #3
CPU1_DIIMM #3
CPU1_DIIMM #1
CPU1_DIIMM #4
CPU1_DIIMM #2
REAR
FRONT
Mother board
Upgrading Your Server 11-13
Installation Order
Installation order depends on the number of CPUs installed.
„
1-CPU configuration:
Install DIMMs starting from the smallest slot number.
„
2-CPU configuration:
Alternately install DIMMs starting from the smallest slot number of each CPU.
„
If DIMMs of different capacity are to be installed together, install DIMMs starting from
the largest capacity, from the smallest slot number.
IMPORTANT: In 2-CPU configuration, the actual installation
location differs from the indication on NEC ESMPRO as shown below.
„
1-CPU configuration:
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
„
Installed slot
Indication on NEC ESMPRO
CPU1_DIMM1 slot
CPU1_DIMM2 slot
CPU1_DIMM3 slot
CPU1_DIMM4 slot
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
Memory 4
2-CPU configuration:
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
1-CPU configuration
Installed slot
Indication on NEC ESMPRO
CPU1_DIMM1 slot
CPU2_DIMM1 slot
CPU1_DIMM2 slot
CPU2_DIMM2 slot
CPU1_DIMM3 slot
CPU2_DIMM3 slot
CPU1_DIMM4 slot
CPU2_DIMM4 slot
Memory 1
Memory 5
Memory 2
Memory 6
Memory 3
Memory 7
Memory 4
Memory 8
REAR
FRONT
2-CPU configuration
2nd
3rd
4th
7th
1st
1st
3rd
5th
6th
2nd
8th
4th
11-14 Upgrading Your Server
IMPORTANT:
„
If CPU2 is not installed, CPU2_DIMM1 through CPU2_DIMM4
are not available.
„
If you are going to install N8102-340/341, install DIMMs starting
from the smallest slot number.
NOTE: The additional 1-GB memory board is unavailable for x4
SDDC feature. To use x4 SDDC feature, additional 2-GB/4-GB
memory board is required.
Memory Clock
Memory clock speed depends on CPU model installed.
„
Xeon E5504/L5506
Always operates at 800MHz.
„
Xeon L5520
Operates at 1066MHz.
May operate at 800MHz depending on memory configuration.
Memory RAS Feature
The server supports LockStep (x8 SDDC) feature as memory RAS feature. For more informaton,
see "Using the Memory RAS Features" described later.
To use x4 SDDC feature, you need to remove the factory-installed DIMMs and install 2GB/4GB
DIMMs.
Upgrading Your Server 11-15
Installation
Install a DIMM in the following procedure.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Open the levers at both ends of the socket for the DIMM to be installed.
Push the DIMM to the socket straight.
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of DIMM. The terminal side of
the DIMM has key and key slot to prevent incorrect insertion.
If the DIMM is inserted into the DIMM socket, the lever is automatically closed.
3.
Install the components you have removed in Step 1.
4.
Power on the server. Make sure that no error message appears in the POST.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error
messages listed in Chapter 10.
5.
Run BIOS SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] to verify that the
installed DIMMs are detected by BIOS (shown on the screen). (See Chapter 4 for details.)
6.
Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu.
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for
details.
7.
Set the paging file size to the recommended value or a greater value.
See Chapter 5, 6, or 7 for details.
11-16 Upgrading Your Server
Removal
Remove the DIMM according to the following procedure.
NOTES:
„
To remove the defected DIMM, check the error message appearing
in POST or NEC ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket in which
the defected DIMM is installed.
„
The server needs at least one DIMM installed to operate.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Open the levers at both ends of the socket for the DIMM to be removed.
The lock is released to allow the DIMM to be removed.
3.
Install the components you have removed in Step 1.
4.
Power on the server. Make sure that no error message appears in the POST.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error
messages listed in Chapter 10.
5.
Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu.
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for
details.
6.
If you have replaced the failed DIMM with new one, run BIOS SETUP and select
[Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory Retest] → [Enabled], and reboot the
server.
This is required to clear the error information of the removed DIMM. See Chapter 4 for
details.
7.
Set the paging file size to the recommended value or a greater value.
See Chapter 5, 6, or 7 for details.
Upgrading Your Server 11-17
Using the Memory RAS Features
The server has RAS feature including "Standard memory configuration (x4 SDDC ECC memory)
and "LockStep (x8 SDDC ECC memory) feature. SDDC (Single Device Correction) allows
automatic correction of memory error (multi-bit error).
IMPORTANT:
„
To use x4 SDDC ECC memory feature, additional 2-GB/4-GB
memory board is required. The factory-installed two 1-GB DIMMs
and additional 1-GB memory board is unavailable for x4 SDDC
feature.
„
"LockStep (x8 SDDC ECC memory) feature cannot be used
together with "Standard memory configuration (x4 SDDC ECC
memory)
The memory area on the motherboard of the server is divided into two memory channels as shown
in the figure below.
CPU1
CPU2
Memory controller
Memory controller
CH0
CH1
CH0
CH1
CPU1_DIMM 3
CPU1_DIMM 4
CPU2_DIMM 3
CPU2_DIMM 4
CPU1_DIMM 1
CPU1_DIMM 2
CPU2_DIMM 1
CPU2_DIMM 2
The LockStep feature keeps memory redundancy between memory channels by monitoring or
altering memory active/inactive status, respectively.
11-18 Upgrading Your Server
LockStep Feature (x8 SDDC)
In LockStep feature, the DIMMs in two groups corresponding to two memory channels (channels 0
and 1) is multiplexed and operated in parallel to enable x8 SDDC (x8 Single Device Data
Correction). With this feature, a single device can detect and correct one to eight-bit error.
CPU1
Memory controller
CH0
CH1
CPU1_DIMM 3
CPU1_DIMM 4
CPU1_DIMM 1
CPU1_DIMM 2
CPU2
Memory controller
CH0
CH1
CPU2_DIMM 3
CPU2_DIMM 4
CPU2_DIMM 1
CPU2_DIMM 2
Upgrading Your Server 11-19
The LockStep feature can be used under the following conditions:
„
Install two DIMMs that operate in parallel in memory socket.
„
All the installed DIMMs should have the same capacity.
„
Run SETUP (see Chapter 4), change parameters appropriately in the menu selected as
shown below, save the settings and exit from SETUP.
Select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration submenu] → [Memory RAS Feature] →
[Lock Step].
„
Install memory devices in the following order:
1-CPU configuration
REAR
FRONT
2-CPU configuration
2nd
3rd
4th
7th
1st
1st
3rd
5th
6th
2nd
8th
4th
The following LockStep cannot be configured:
„
LockStep between memory channels of different memory controllers (CPU).
„
LockStep within the same memory channel.
11-20 Upgrading Your Server
Notes on Configuring LockStep
In LockStep configuration, [Memory RAS Mode] menu is changed from "LockStep" to
"Independent" in the following cases:
„
When you additionally install DIMMs that unable to configure LockStep
„
When you remove DIMMs that takes down the LockStep
In this case, execute [Load Setup Defaults] to cancel the LockStep configuration.
1.
Take a note of settings in BIOS SETUP.
2.
Press F2 during POST to run BIOS SETUP utility.
3.
Select [Exit] → [Load Setup Defaults].
4.
When a message "Load default configuration now?" appears, select [Yes].
5.
Enter the parameter values you have saved in Step 1.
NOTE: Executing [Load Setup Defaults] restores the default values
for all Setup parameters. You need to specify those parameters again.
Upgrading Your Server 11-21
Processor (CPU)
The server may have another CPU installed in addition to the factory-installed CPU (Intel Xeon
Processor).
IMPORTANT:
„
The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to
touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity
from your body before handling the CPU. Do not touch the CPU
pins by a bare hand or place the CPU directly on the desk. For static
notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.
„
Do not operate the system until confirming that the additionally
installed CPU is in normal state.
„
Make sure to use the CPU authorized by NEC. Installing a thirdparty CPU may cause a failure of the CPU as well as the mother
board. Repair of the server due to failures or damage resulted from
installing such a board will be charged.
„
If you install an additional CPU, you need to change DIMM
installation location. See "DIMM" for details.
CPU #1
(factory-installed)
CPU #2
(option)
Mother board
11-22 Upgrading Your Server
Installation
Install a CPU in the following procedure.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the duct cover.
3.
Push the socket lever down to unlatch the socket from the hook, then slowly open the
lever until it stops.
4.
Lift the load plate.
5.
Remove the protective cover from the socket.
Upgrading Your Server 11-23
IMPORTANT:
6.
„
Keep the protective cover for future use. Always mount the socket
cover if the CPU is removed from the socket.
„
Do not touch the socket contacts.
Take out the new CPU and remove the protective cover.
IMPORTANT: Hold the CPU only at the edges. Be careful not to
touch the bottom of the CPU (pin portion).
7.
Place the CPU on the socket slowly and carefully.
Hold the CPU with your thumb and index fingers oriented as shown in the figure below.
Notch
Pin mark
Key
Pin mark
NOTES:
„
Align notches with the key on the socket.
„
Bring the CPU straight down without tilting or sliding it in the
socket.
11-24 Upgrading Your Server
8.
Lightly press the CPU to the socket, then close the plate.
9.
Bring down the lever to secure the CPU.
10.
Remove the protective cover from the heat sink.
11.
Put the heat sink on CPU.
Upgrading Your Server 11-25
NOTE: The CPU must be installed in correct direction, as shown in
the figure below.
FRONT
12.
Secure the heat sink with four screws.
Temporarily tighten the four screws on cater corner, then tighten them securely after
making sure that the heat sink has been seated.
13.
1
4
3
2
Make sure that the heat sink is level with the mother board.
IMPORTANT:
„
If the heat sink is not level, remove it, and then install it again. If the
CPU is not positioned correctly, it causes the heat sink not to be
level.
„
Do not move the secured heat sink.
„
If you install an additional CPU, you need to change DIMM
installation location. See "DIMM" for details.
14.
Install the duct cover, and secure it with a setscrew.
15.
Set [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu to "Yes".
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for
details.
16.
To add one or more CPUs to the server in 1-CPU configuration to operate the server with
more than one CPU, do the following:
Change the driver of [Computer] in the [Device Manager] to [ACPI multi-processor PC]
and then update the system (see Chapter 5, 6, or 7).
11-26 Upgrading Your Server
Removal
To remove the CPU, prepare the removal referring to Steps 1 and 2 in the installation procedure and
do the reverse procedure of steps 11 to 4. To remove the heat sink, remove the screw, then slide it a
little on the level and remove it (see "IMPORTANT" below).
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not remove any CPU unless it is failed.
„
After the operation, heat may make the cool sheet at the bottom of
the heat sink adhere to the CPU. To remove the heat sink from the
CPU, first turn the heat sink to the left and right lightly to make sure
that the heat sink can be apart from the CPU. Removing the heat
sink with it adhering to the CPU may cause the CPU and/or socket
to be defected.
Do the following procedure if a CPU is removed (or replaced).
1.
Run SETUP and select menus [Main] – [Processor Settings] to confirm that the ID, L2
Cache Size, and L3 Cache Size of the CPU are defined normally (see Chapter 4).
2.
Set [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu to "Yes".
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for
details.
Upgrading Your Server 11-27
PCI Board
The server has a riser card assembly on the mother board. The riser card has two slots for PCI
Express board.
IMPORTANT: Any PCI board or riser card is easily affected by static
electricity. Handle a board after making your body contact with a
metallic frame section of the server to discharge the static electricity on
your body. Do not make bare hands contact with terminals and
components on the PCI board or riser card. In addition, do not put them
on a desk directly. See "Static Precautions" in this chapter for details of
the static electricity.
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
Riser card
PCI #2 side
PCI #1 side
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
Riser card
PCI #2 side
PCI #1 side
11-28 Upgrading Your Server
Riser card
N code
Product
name
PCI slot capacity
Slot size
PCI board type
Available board size
N8103-107
Standard
Slot
Slot
(Bus A)
(Bus B)
PCIe #1
PCIe #2
x8 lane
Low Profile
x16 socket x8 socket
200 mm max.
Note
SCSI controller
(PCI EXPRESS (x1))
N8103-104A SAS controller
(PCI EXPRESS (x8))
N8103-116A RAID controller
(128 MB, RAID0/1)
(PCI EXPRESS (x8))
N8103-117A RAID controller
(128 MB, RAID0/1/5/6)
(PCI EXPRESS (x8))
N8103-118A RAID controller
(256 MB, RAID0/1/5/6)
(PCI EXPRESS (x8))
N8103-115
RAID controller
(512 MB, RAID0/1/5/6)
(PCI EXPRESS (x8))
N8190-127
Fibre Channel controller
(4Gbps/Optical)
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))
N8193-153
Fibre Channel controller
(8Gbps/Optical)
(PCI EXPRESS 2.0 (x8))
N8190-131
Fibre Channel controller (2ch)
(4Gbps/Optical)
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))
N8193-154
Fibre Channel controller (2ch)
(8Gbps/Optical)
(PCI EXPRESS 2.0 (x8))
N8104-126
1000BASE-T adapter
(PCI EXPRESS (x1))
√
√
√
√
–
√
–
√
–
√
√
√
Cannot connect with internal hard disk drive.
√
√
Cannot be used together with N8190-153/154.
√
√
Cannot be used together with 127/131.
√
√
Cannot be used together with 153/154.
√
√
Cannot be used together with 127131.
√
√
N8104-122
1000BASE-T adapter (2ch)
(PCI EXPRESS (x4))
√
√
N8104-125
1000BASE-T adapter (4ch)
(PCI EXPRESS(x4))
√
√
√
√
Teaming with another N8104-126
(AFT/SFT/ALB) is not allowed.
Teaming with any other NIC (FEC/GEC) is not
allowed.
10BASE-T unsupported
Teaming with another N8104-122
(AFT/SFT/ALB) is not allowed.
Teaming with any other NIC (FEC/GEC) is not
allowed.
10BASE-T unsupported
1 max.
Teaming with any other NIC (FEC/GEC) is not
allowed.
10BASE-T unsupported
1 max.
√
√
1 max.
N8104-123A 10GBASE-SR adapter
(PCI EXPRESS (x8))
N8117-01A
Additional RS232C connector kit
Cannot connect with internal hard disk drive.
√: Available, –: Unavailable
NOTE: Set "Disabled" for the Option ROM Scan of the PCI slot
connected with non-bootable device by using BIOS SETUP utility.
Disabling Option ROM Scan saves memory consumption and time for
startup.
Upgrading Your Server 11-29
Installation
Install the board in PCI board slot in the following procedure.
NOTE: When installing a PCI board, make sure that the board
connector matches the connector of the PCI board slot.
IMPORTANT: The server can contain a short-type PCI board only,
not the long-type one.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove a fixing screw from the riser card. Hold both ends of the riser card assembly and
lift straight up and remove the riser card from the server.
3.
Remove the screw from the riser card, and remove the additional slot cover.
PCIe#2
Low profile side
PCIe#1
Low profile side
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed additional slot cover for future use.
11-30 Upgrading Your Server
4.
Install the PCI board on the riser card.
Align the PCI board terminal section with the riser card slot, and firmly push the PCI
board until it is fully seated.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not touch the terminals of the riser card and PCI board and the
leads of electronic components with your bare hand. Fingerprints
and dust left on them cause the server to malfunction due to a
connection failure or damage to the leads.
„
If the board cannot be installed well, remove the board once and
then install it again. Note that adding an excess force to the board
may cause it to be damaged.
NOTE: Confirm that the end of the PCI board bracket is inserted in the
frame slot of the riser card.
5.
Secure the PCI board with the screw you removed in Step 3.
PCIe #2 Low-profile side
PCIe #1 Low-profile side
Upgrading Your Server 11-31
6.
Insert the riser card assembly into the slot on the mother board.
Secure the riser card with a screw removed in Step 2.
Align the riser card terminal section with the slot on the mother board, and firmly push the
riser card until it is fully seated.
NOTE: There are catches on the riser card frame that are used to
secure the riser card to the chassis. When inserting the riser card,
confirm that the catches are correctly fit into the holes of the chassis.
After the insertion, push the riser card with your fingers until you
cannot see any part of the riser card terminal section. The riser card is
now fully seated in the slot.
7.
Install the components you have removed in earlier steps.
8.
Power on the server. Make sure that no error message appears in the POST.
If an error message appears, write down the message and contact your service
representative for the maintenance.
9.
Run BIOS SETUP Utility to set the [Reset Configuration Data] in the [Advanced] menu
to "Yes".
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for
details.
Some PCI boards use an on-board expanded ROM. See the manual provided with the PCI
board to determine whether expanded ROM needs to be loaded.
11-32 Upgrading Your Server
Removal
Remove a PCI board in reverse order of the installation steps.
Remove a PCI board by holding it securely. Ask any other person to hold the server not to move
during removal of the board.
If you do not install the board after removal, be sure to install the additional slot cover of the riser
card on the slot from which you remove the board. Secure the additional slot cover with screw.
IMPORTANT: Run BIOS SETUP utility, select "Yes" for [Reset
Configuration Data] in the [Advanced] menu to update the hardware
configuration data.
Upgrading Your Server 11-33
Installing N8117-01A
The shipping carton contains the following components.
Item No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
RS-232C Connector Kit
Handling Guide
RS-232C cable (A)
RS-232C cable (B)
PCI bracket (1)
PCI bracket (2)
Specification No.
856-125671-002
Q'ty
1
804-063264-020
804-062746-820
243-112122-001
243-112122-002
1
1
1
1
Remarks
Attached to the cable
For Full Height PCI board
4
2
3
5
Use Item No. 3 (RS-232C cable (B)) and No. 4 (PCI bracket (1)).
Install N8117-01A in the following procedure.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove a fixing screw from the riser card. Hold both ends of the riser card assembly and
lift straight up and remove the riser card from the server.
11-34 Upgrading Your Server
3.
Remove the screw from the riser card, and remove the additional slot cover.
PCIe#2
Low profile side
PCIe#1
Low profile side
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed additional slot cover for future use.
4.
Install the PCI bracket firmly, and secure it with the screw removed in Step 3.
Serial port A connector
Upgrading Your Server 11-35
5.
Route the cable so that it does not interfere with the other PCI board, and connect the
cable to the Serial Port A connector on mother board.
Connect the cable properly by making sure the polarity of connector. See the figure below
for location of Serial Port A connector.
Mother board
Serial Port A connector
11-36 Upgrading Your Server
6.
Insert the riser card assembly into the slot on the mother board.
Secure the riser card with a screw removed in Step 2.
Align the riser card terminal section with the slot on the mother board, and firmly push the
riser card until it is fully seated.
7.
Make sure that the removed slot cover, screw, or tools are not left in the server. Then,
reassemble the server.
8.
Run BIOS SETUP Utility and select [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] - [Serial
Port A] - [Enabled].
When set to [Enabled], menus [Base I/O Address] and [Interrupt] are additionally
displayed.
The factory-set value for these parameters are:
Base I/O Address: 3F8H
Interrupt: IRQ 4
Upgrading Your Server 11-37
Additional Battery Unit for RAID Controller
Take the following steps to install an additional battery to RAID Controller (N8103115/116A/117A/118A).
Installation
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the duct cover.
3.
Remove the RAID Controller, and install the battery connection board that comes with
additional battery to the RAID Controller.
4.
Connect the cable to the battery connection board.
Make sure the markings on connector and that on the cable.
IMPORTANT: For N8103-115 RAID Controller, use the cable of 750
mm length (804-063451-075-A).
11-38 Upgrading Your Server
5.
Remove a fixing screw from the riser card. Hold both ends of the riser card assembly and
lift straight up and remove the riser card from the server.
6.
Remove the screw from the riser card, and remove the additional slot cover.
PCIe#2
Low profile side
PCIe#1
Low profile side
7.
Install the RAID Controller on the riser card.
Upgrading Your Server 11-39
8.
Insert the riser card assembly into the slot on the mother board.
Secure the riser card with a screw removed in Step 4.
Align the riser card terminal section with the slot on the mother board, and firmly push the
riser card until it is fully seated.
9.
Remove the two fixing screws and remove the battery mounting bracket.
11-40 Upgrading Your Server
10.
Connect the cable to additional battery.
Make sure the markings on connector and that on the cable.
11.
Install the additional battery to the bracket with three screws.
Install the additional battery in the place as shown in the figure below.
Install an additional battery for
RAID Controller in PCI slot #1.
Install an additional battery for
RAID Controller in PCI slot #2.
Upgrading Your Server 11-41
12.
Install the battery mounting bracket that has been removed in Step 9. Secure the battery to
the bracket with two screws.
Removal
The additional battery can be removed in the reverse order of the installation.
11-42 Upgrading Your Server
Use of Internal Hard Disk Drives In the Raid System
This section describes how to use hard disk drives installed in the drive bays in the RAID System.
IMPORTANT:
„
Making hard disk drives in the RAID System or changing the RAID
level initializes hard disk drives. If the hard disk drive to be
configured in the RAID System has your valuable data stored, make
sure to make a backup copy of the data in another hard disk drive
before installing the RAID Controller and configuring the RAID
System.
„
More than one hard disk drive is required to configure a Logical
Drive.
„
Use hard disk drives of the same capacity and performance (e.g.,
revolution) for each pack to configure them in the RAID System.
NOTES:
„
Make sure of RAID levels and hard disk drives available for the
RAID Controller to choose an appropriate controller.
„
A Logical Drive except for RAID0 increases disk reliability.
However, the actually available capacity becomes smaller than the
total hard disk drive capacity in the Logical Drive.
You can build a RAID System by using the Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded
MegaRAID) or optional RAID Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A).
To use this RAID System, you need to change jumper switch settings on mother board and
backplane board.
See the figure below for locations of jumper switches on Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded
MegaRAID) and optional RAID Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A), which are used to
enable/disable the RAID Controller.
Upgrading Your Server 11-43
Mother board
Enable
Disable
SW-RAID configuration jumper switch (SATA_RAID)
Backplane board for 3.5-inch hard disk drive
Mother
board
Optional RAID
controller
Controller configuration jumper switch (J3)
Backplane board for 2.5-inch hard disk drive
Mother
board
Optional RAID
controller
Controller configuration jumper switch (J3)
* The illustration shows the backplane board viewed from the rear side.
11-44 Upgrading Your Server
Onboard RAID Controller (LSI Embedded MegaRAID)
RAID Controller is factory embedded in your mother board. Setting RAID configuration jumper
switch allows internal hard disk drives to be recognized as RAID drives. Set the jumper switch as
shown below.
Setting of Jumper Switches on Mother Board and Backplane Board
Set the jumper pin as shown below.
„
Jumper pin on mother board (SATA_RAID)
SW-RAID configuration jumper switch
1
2
3
Enable (1-2)
„
Backplane board
Controller configuration jumper switch
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
1
3
2
3
2
1
Mother board (1-2)
Mother board (1-2)
Use LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility to configure the RAID System. See Chapter 4 for
details.
Optional RAID Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A)
Your server can include the optional RAID Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A). The optional
RAID Controller can control the internal hard disk drives as the RAID System. To use the hard disk
drives in a RAID System, reconnect the hard disk drive interface cable on the mother board.
At the factory, the interface cable is connected to the SATA connector on the mother board.
Refer to the manual coming with optional RAID Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A) for details.
IMPORTANT: The RAID Controller board is extremely sensitive to
static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame of the server to
discharge static electricity from your body before handling the RAID
Controller. Do not touch the RAID Controller terminals or on-board
parts by a bare hand or place the RAID Controller directly on the desk.
For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.
NOTE: Before installing an optional RAID Controller, run the SETUP
utility, select [Advanced] → [PCI Configuration], and confirm that
[Enabled] is set for the parameter [PCI Slot xx ROM] (xx: PCI slot
number).
Upgrading Your Server 11-45
Installation
See "PCI Board" in this chapter and manual that comes with the optional RAID Controller for the
installation of a RAID Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A).
IMPORTANT: When the RAID Controller is connected, the boot
priority specified in BIOS SETUP utility must be eighth or younger. If
specified ninth or later, the configuration menu of RAID Controller will
fail to start.
Setting of Jumper Switches on Mother Board and Backplane Board
To use the optional RAID Controller (N8103-116A/117A/118A), you need to change jumper switch
setting on the mother board and the backplane board.
See "Use of Internal Hard Disk Drives In the Raid System" for jumper pin locations.
„
Jumper pin on mother board (SATA_RAID)
SW-RAID configuration jumper switch
1
2
3
Disable (2-3)
„
Backplane board
Controller configuration jumper switch
3.5-inch hard disk drive model
2.5-inch hard disk drive model
3
2
1
2
3
1
Optional RAID
Controller (2-3)
Removal
Remove the optional RAID Controller in reverse order of the installation steps.
If you use the server with the optional RAID Controller being removed, be sure to install the
additional slot cover that has been removed from the riser card. Secure the additional slot cover with
the screw.
11-46 Upgrading Your Server
Cable Routing
If the optional RAID controller is installed, the interface cable needs to be routed. See the figures
below for how to route the cable.
< 3.5-inch hard disk drive model with Onboard RAID Controller > (Factory-installed)
In standard configuration, the cable is connected with the SATA connector on mother board. You
need not to change cable connection.
< 3.5-inch hard disk drive model with Optional RAID Controller installed >
Disconnect the SAS/SATA cable from the SATA connector on mother board, then connect it with
the connector on Optional RAID Controller.
Upgrading Your Server 11-47
< 2.5-inch hard disk drive model with Onboard RAID Controller installed >
In standard configuration, the cable is connected with the SATA connector on mother board. You
need not to change cable connection.
< 2.5-inch hard disk drive model with Optional RAID Controller installed >
Disconnect the SAS/SATA cable from the SATA connector on mother board, then connect it with
the connector on Optional RAID Controller.
IMPORTANT: In standard configuration of 2.5-inch hard disk drive
model, two SAS/SATA cables are connected. Be sure to connect both
SAS/SATA cables to the connectors on optional RAID Controller. You
cannot use the onboard RAID Controller and Optional RAID Controller
simultaneously.
11-48 Upgrading Your Server
Notice
Observe the following notes on configuring a RAID System:
„
The installed hard disk drives (SAS drives or SATA drives) must the same capacity and
the same rotational speed. (The minimum number of required disks depends on the
configuration of RAID.)
„
Select/set a RAID level "RAID0" or "RAID1".
When installing a system in an internal hard disk drive, you should use "Express Setup" to perform
all the procedures for RAID System configuration, OS installation, and then OS setup.
Use Express Setup even when not installing a system. Start Express Setup, select [OS Selection] →
[Others]. The installer automatically performs all the procedures for RAID System configuration,
and then maintenance utility installation.
When making the setup in manual mode, use the RAID System configuration utility in the chip on
the board. You can start the utility during execution of POST that automatically starts immediately
after you turn on the server power switch. For details, see the document in the NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER DVD provided with the server. (The utility varies depending on the RAID
Controller.) For details on the data transfer rate, RAID, and RAID System configuration, see the
manual provided with the RAID Controller as well as the document.
Appendix A
Specifications
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive Model
NEC Express5800/iR120a-1E
N8100-1578F
N8100-1579F
N8100-1580F
CPU
Type
Quad-core Intel Xeon processor
Clock
2GHz
2.26GHz
2.13GHz
Standard
1
Maximum
2
Chipset
Intel 5500 (800/1066 MHz)
Memory
Memory module
DDR3-1333
Minimum
1GB
Maximum
32GB (4GB x 8)
Error check
ECC
Display
Graphics accelerator
ServerEngines 2nd Gen Server Management Controller embedded
Video RAM
8MB
Graphic display
640x480, 800x600, 1,024x768, 1,280x1,024:
16,770,000 colors max.
Auxiliary Floppy disk drive (standard) None
storage
Hard disk drive (standard)
None
device
Hard disk drive (maximum) SATA2 (2TBx 4)
Hot-plug hard disk drive
SATA HDD x 4
Optical disk drive (standard) None
Additional PCI
PCI EXPRESS (x8) x 1, PCI EXPRESS (x8) x 1 (x16 socket)
slot
Disk array Standard
Onboard SATA SW RAID (0, 1, 10)
Option
RAID Controller
Internal interface
SAS: None (option)
SATA: 6 ports
Interface Keyboard
None
Mouse
None
Serial
Rear: D-sub 9-pin (RS-232C compliant) x 1
Internal: D-sub 9-pin (RS-232C compliant) x 1 (Option)
Network
1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T (RJ-45, 2 ports)
100Base-TX/10Base-T (1 port for management port)
Display
D-sub 15-pin x 2 (1 each on front and rear panel)
USB2.0
4-pin connector x 4 (2 for front panel, 2 for rear panel)
Chassis design
Rack-mount (1U height)
External dimensions (mm)
444 (width) × 44.3 (height) × 617 (depth)
Weight (Max.)
10.5 kg (16.5 kg)
Power supply
100 to 120 VAC ±10%, 200 to 240 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1 Hz
Power consumption Operating
353 VA, 349 W
338 VA, 335 W
316 VA, 314 W
Standby
198 VA, 197 W
187 VA, 185 W
177 VA, 176 W
Environmental
Temperature
10 to 35°C (operating), -10 to 55°C (non-operating, storage)
requirements
Humidity
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
Item
A-2 Specifications
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive Model
NEC Express5800/iR120a-1E
N8100-1575F
N8100-1576F
N8100-1577F
CPU
Type
Quad-core Intel Xeon processor
Clock
2GHz
2.26GHz
2.13GHz
Standard
1
Maximum
2
Chipset
Intel 5500 (800/1066 MHz)
Memory
Memory module
DDR3-1333
Minimum
1GB
Maximum
32GB (4GB x 8)
Error check
ECC
Display
Graphics accelerator
ServerEngines 2nd Gen Server Management Controller embedded
Video RAM
8MB
Graphic display
640x480, 800x600, 1,024x768, 1,280x1,024:
16,770,000 colors max.
Auxiliary Floppy disk drive (standard) None
storage
Hard disk drive (standard)
None
device
Hard disk drive (maximum) SATA2 (500GB x 8), SAS (300G x 8), SSD (50G x 8)
Hot-plug hard disk drive
SAS/SATASSD HDD x 8
Optical disk drive (standard) None
Additional PCI
PCI EXPRESS (x8) x 1, PCI EXPRESS (x8) x 1 (x16 socket)
slot
Disk array Standard
Onboard SATA SW RAID (0, 1, 10)
Option
RAID Controller
Internal interface
SAS: None (option)
SATA: 6 ports
Interface Keyboard
None
Mouse
None
Serial
Rear: D-sub 9-pin (RS-232C compliant) x 1
Internal: D-sub 9-pin (RS-232C compliant) x 1 (Option)
Network
1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T (RJ-45, 2 ports)
100Base-TX/10Base-T (1 port for management port)
Display
D-sub 15-pin x 2 (1 each on front and rear panel)
USB2.0
4-pin connector x 4 (2 for front panel, 2 for rear panel)
Chassis design
Rack-mount (1U height)
External dimensions (mm)
444 (width) × 44.3 (height) × 617 (depth)
Weight (Max.)
10.5 kg (16 kg)
Power supply
100 to 120 VAC ±10%, 200 to 240 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1 Hz
Power consumption Operating
366 VA, 363 W
353 VA, 350 W
335 VA, 332 W
Standby
212 VA, 210 W
194 VA, 192 W
192 VA, 190 W
Environmental
Temperature
10 to 35°C (operating), -10 to 55°C (non-operating, storage)
requirements
Humidity
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
Item
Appendix B
Other Precautions
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller
The mother board includes the two network interface controllers that supports 10Base-T, 100BaseTX, and 1000Base-T networks and a capable of full or half duplex.
The both controllers can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode
connected to the HUB. However, for proper network operation, specify the "Link Speed & Duplex"
value the same as the value specified for HUB.
Server Management Software
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO utility.
NEC recommends that you should install the NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability
enhancement features of the server.
Floppy Disk
The following describes use of the floppy disk.
Floppy disk type
The server uses 3.5-inch floppy disks. You can use the following two types of 3.5-inch floppy disks:
„
2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)
Stores data of 1.44MB.
„
2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)
Stores data of 720KB.
Shutter
Insertion direction
indicator
Catching hole
Head window
Centering hub
Label
Centering hole
High-density media hole
(2HD only)
Write protection
hole
Front
Write protection switch
Rear
B-2 Other Precautions
Notes on use
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care. Keep
the following notes in mind to use it:
„
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.
„
Attach the label to the correct position.
„
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.
„
Do not open the shutter.
„
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.
„
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct
sunlight or close to a heater).
„
Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette
smoke.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a
chemical may be accidentally sprayed over them.
„
Do not place any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet) near the floppy disk.
„
Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it.
„
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.
Other Precautions B-3
„
Write-protection
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental
erasure.
You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data into the
floppy disk or format it. NEC recommends that you should write-protect any floppy disk
containing valuable data unless you are about to save data.
To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.
„
Disk format
To write data into a floppy disk, the floppy disk must be "formatted." "Formatting" is to
initialize the floppy disk and make it available for the system environment (operating
system).
IMPORTANT:
„
Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it, if
any.
„
Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not
available with the server. Use a formatted floppy disk to work with
it on the DOS command line.
The format method depends on your operating system. Refer to the manual that comes
with your operating system for details.
„
Data backup
"Data backup" is to copy data stored in a media into another media (e.g., floppy disk,
digital audio tape, or magnet-optical disk).
IMPORTANT: Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy
disk, if provided.
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as
operator's misconduct or server failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data,
NEC recommends that you should make a back-up copy of your valuable data on a
regular basis.
B-4 Other Precautions
CD/DVD Discs
Keep the following notes in mind to use the disc for the server:
„
Press the center of the storage case to remove the disc from the case.
„
Do not drop the disc.
„
Do not place anything on the disc or bend the disc.
„
Do not attach any label onto the disc.
„
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.
„
Place the disc with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.
„
Do not scratch the disc or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point pen.
„
Do not leave the disc with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke.
„
Do not leave the disc in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct sunlight or
close to a heater).
„
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the disc, wipe the disc from its center to edge
with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.
„
Use the disc cleaner to clean the disc. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or
thinner.
„
Keep the disc in a disc case when not in use.
Tape Media
The following describes data handling with the DAT, DLT, or AIT optionally available for the
server.
„
Saving your valuable data
When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape, you should save
them into two cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes.
This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error, as
well as to protect your valuable data and programs from loss.
„
Three-generation data management
NEC recommends that you should employ three-generation data management for data
storage.
Three-generation data management uses three cartridge tapes: A, B, and C. You save data
to tape A on the first day, tape B on the second day, tape C on the third day, tape A on the
forth day, and so on. That is, you save data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape A
through C.
This enables you, for example, to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read
error. Also when both tapes B and C make a read error, you can restore your valuable data
by using the data stored in tape A.
Other Precautions B-5
Keyboard
The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the
keyboard. Doing so may cause a failure of the keyboard.
„
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of
an angle. Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to
operate. The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders,
arms, and fingers.
NOTE: The keyboard functions depend on the software. Refer to the
manual that comes with the software for details.
B-6 Other Precautions
Mouse
Like the keyboard, the mouse is a device to instruct your computer. Many OS's and application
software require the mouse for operation.
NOTE:
„
Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the
software. For details, refer to the manual provided with the
software.
„
Use the mouse on a clean desk. Using the mouse on a dusty or dirty
desk disturbs smooth movement or normal operation of the mouse.
When your mouse movement seems dull, clean your mouse. (See
Chapter 9.)
Mouse operation includes "Click," "Double-click," and "Drag."
Click:
Press the button only once and release it.
Double-click:
Press the button twice consecutively and release it.
Drag:
Press and hold the button and move the mouse.
Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the
keyboard.
Click
Pressing
Click
Click
Click
Double-click
Drag
Appendix C
IRQ
The factory-set interrupt requests is listed below. Find an appropriate one to install an optional
device.
IRQ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Peripheral Device (Controller)
System timer
–
–
COM2 serial port
COM1 serial port
–
–
PCI
Real-time clock
ACPI Compliant System
–
SMBUS
–
Numeric processor
–
–
LAN1, LAN2
AHCI
PCI, VGA
–
USB
USB
USB
C-2 IRQ
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Appendix D
Using a Client Computer Which Has a CD Drive
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER disk is DVD so that a client computer which you want to use for
managing the server needs a DVD drive.
If you want to install the management software of EXPRESSBUILDER to the client without the
DVD drive, make a CD-R from EXPRESSBUILDER DVD according to the following steps.
NOTE: This procedure can copy only one CD at the purpose of
installing the management software to the client.
1.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER DVD to the computer which has a DVD drive.
2.
If Autorun menu appears, close the menu.
3.
Copy the below files of EXPRESSBUILDER to a hard disk drive by using Explorer.
\(root folder) : copy version.xml
\013
\ar_menu : copy this sub-folder
\doc : copy this sub-folder
\win : copy this sub-folder
4.
Delete the ar_menu\autorun_menu.xml on the hard disk drive, and rename the
ar_menu\autorun_en.xml on the hard disk drive to the autorun_menu.xml.
5.
Copy the above files/folders to a CD-R.
Match the root folder when you burn a CD-R.
6.
Delete the files/folders that you copied at step 3.
7.
Insert the CD-R to a client computer which you want to install the management software.
8.
Kick the below file of the CD-R by using Explorer.
\013\ar_menu\autorun_menu.exe
(for Windows 32 bit edition)
autorun_menu_x64.exe
(for Windows 64 bit edition)
D-2 Using a Client Computer Which Has a CD Drive
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Appendix E
Product Configuration Record Table
Use this table for information about setup and system environment change.
Hardware
Main Unit
Model name
CPU
#1
Clock
#2
Clock
Memory
CPU1_DIMM1 Size
CPU1_DIMM2 Size
CPU1_DIMM3 Size
CPU1_DIMM4 Size
CPU2_DIMM1 Size
CPU2_DIMM2 Size
CPU2_DIMM3 Size
CPU2_DIMM4 Size
Hard Disk Drive
#1
Type
Capacity
Type number
#2
Type
Capacity
Type number
#3
Type
Capacity
Type number
#4
Type
Capacity
Type number
#5
Type
Capacity
Type number
#6
Type
Capacity
Type number
#7
Type
Capacity
Type number
#8
Type
Capacity
Type number
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Serial No.
Date Installed
Date Installed
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
E-2 Product Configuration Record Table
Monitor
Type
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCI Slot #1
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCI Slot #2
PCI Slot #3
External Peripheral Device 1
Model name
Manufacturer
External Peripheral Device 2
Model name
Manufacturer
External Peripheral Device 3
Model name
Manufacturer
External Peripheral Device 4
Model name
Manufacturer
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Product Configuration Record Table
Software
Firmware version
OS
Application of RUR media
File system
Bundled software installed
Licensed software installed
Application running when a failure
occurred
† Apply
† FAT
† Others (
Name:
Name:
† HPFS
Version:
Version:
† NTFS
)
E-3
E-4 Product Configuration Record Table
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Download PDF
Similar pages